Home

GT16 User`s Manual (Hardware)

1. 9 4 5 Part Names and Settings of the GT1655 No Name Description Lit in green Power is correctly supplied Lit in orange Screen saving 1 POWER LED Blinks in orange green Blown back light bulb Not lit Power is not supplied ne F A m 2 Display screen Displays the Utility and the user creation screen 2 3 Touch key For operating the touch switches in the Utility and the user creation screen 4 USB interface Device For connecting a personal computer Connector type Mini B 3 5 USB interface Host For connecting a USB mouse keyboard data transfer and storage 2 Connector type TYPE A a 5 6 RS 232 interface For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer Connector type D sub 9 pin fi nz For communicating with a controller or using the gateway function gt 90 T Eth t interf nO PENS ere Connector type RJ 45 modular jack 8 RS 422 485 interface For communicating um a controller Connector type 14 pin female no 9 Power terminal Power input terminal FG terminal 6 10 Extension interface1 For installing an extension unit I F 1 3 ma 11 CF card interface For installing a CF card 3 a Lit CF card accessed a 12 SE card access LED Not lit CF card not acce
2. Camcorder GOT side P e e AT sensor side 3 130 or less Ferrite Core 130 or less 6 12 HF90T28X13X16 5 12 40 230 or less 40 40 400 or less Unit mm inch 9 06 1 57 1 57 15 75 b RGB input e Wind cable shield material around the cable and pull out the grounding braided wire of the cable shield material with the length shown below Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the position as illustrated below Ferrite Core Vision sensor GOT side E ZCAT3035 1330 n personal computer Cable shield material 130 or less or less 130 or less lt t e lt 2 a Grounding braided wire 5 12 1 57 50mm 1 57 5 12 Unit mm inch c RGB output e Wind cable shield material around the cable and pull out the grounding braided wire of the cable shield material with the length shown below Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the position as illustrated below Ferrite Core external display side GOT side p ZCAT3035 1330 Boo play 0 fu mn M Grounding braided wire 50mm 200 or less 20 or less 7 87 0 79 0 79 7 87 Unit mm inch Cable shield material 20 or less 200 or less 5 4 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant Product 9 PLC manufa
3. R Model name A B C D p bending radius of the cable GT15 QBUS 95 3 74 79 3 11 55 2 17 GT15 QBUS2 23 0 91 GT15 ABUS 73 5 2 89 57 5 2 26 36 1 42 GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75QBUSL 95 3 74 79 3 11 55 2 17 GT15 75QBUS2L 10 0 39 GT15 75ABUSL 73 5 2 89 57 5 2 26 36 1 42 GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 RS2 9P 16 72 5 2 85 56 5 2 22 GT15 RS4 9S 2 0 63 30 1 18 GT15 RS4 TE 2 33 5 1 32 17 5 0 69 23 0 91 GT15 J71LP23 25 4 4 4 GT15 J71BR13 87 5 3 44 71 5 2 81 30 1 18 GT15 J71GP23 SX 80 3 15 64 2 52 15 0 59 37 1 46 GT15 J71GF13 T2 66 2 60 50 1 97 26 1 02 GT15 J61BT13 47 1 85 31 1 22 23 0 91 28 1 10 GT15 PRN 52 2 05 36 1 42 23 0 91 18 0 71 GT15 CFCD f 22 0 87 GT15 CFEX C08SET 120 4 72 104 4 09 55 2 17 GT15 DIO 16 81 3 19 65 2 56 43 1 69 GT15 DIOR 0 63 23 0 91 GT15 SOUT 44 1 73 28 1 10 30 1 18 Refer to App 1 7 for the depth dimensions when installing units which allows multiple s 2 For cables prepaired by the user the dimensions are different 3 If cable bending radius is smaller than the lowest part of the GOT rear face the dimension of 3 is equal to or less than 0 however it is written as 0 in the table ages Unit mm inch 4 For details of the cable for GT15 J71LP23 25 optical loop unit contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service 5 The bend radius varies depending on the Ethernet cab
4. 9 6 Backlight Replacement 9 9 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 6 Push the backlight fixing latch black to the front face to pull out the backlight Pull out the backlight so that the backlight does not hit the packing When replacing GT16 80SLTT When replacing GT16 70SLTT VLTT The latch is on the right side of the backlight Push the latch to the front face side with the finger Edge on view figure of the part A in step 4 If the latch cannot be reached use a screw driver etc Packing Fluorescent tube 7 Install a new backlight in the reverse procedure of removal When inserting a new backlight into the backlight replacement hole of the GOT make sure not to damage the sheaths of the cables Insert the backlight until it is fixed by the latch black Assemble the case in the reverse procedure of disassembly Tighten the fixing screws on the GOT rear face with a torque of 0 36 to 0 48 Nem When installing the case make sure that the cables are not stuck between the case and the GOT 9 10 9 6 Backlight Replacement E For GT16 70VLTTA The backlight replacement procedure differs according to the hardware version and the manufacture year and month of the GOT L gt Appendix2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards Model name GOT hardware version Manufacture year and month Reference A January 2012 or ea
5. Remove the old battery from the GOT and disconnect the connector Connect the new battery to the connector Install the battery and store it in the reverse procedure of step 2 Turn the GOT power supply on Check if the battery condition is normal within the utility Refer to the following for the details of battery status display ICF Basic Utility 2 1 1 Time setting Shows the setting item displayed on the software screen or the GOT screen Refers to a button displayed on the computer screen or the GOT screen or a key of the computer keyboard Show the items including detailed explanation Hardware GT16 User s Manual Hardware Basic Utility GT16 User s Manual Basic Utility Refers to information required for operation int Refers to information useful for operation Shows the operation steps Operate the steps from the step 1 The above is different from the actual page as it is provided for explanation only A 23 PACKING LIST After unpacking confirm that the following parts are included Model Product Quantity GOT 1 GT1695M X Battery 1 Installation fitting EF 8 GT16 General Description 1 GOT 1 GT1685M S GT1675M S GT1675M V GT1675 VN GT1672 VN Battery 1 GT1665M S GT1665M V GT1662 VN Installation fitting 4 GT16 General Description 1 GOT 1 GT
6. WY OROROORO 130 130 5 12 5 12 230 or less 40 40 400 or less a 9 06 1 57 1 57 15 75 Unit mm inch e CC Link dedicated cable for connecting the GOT and GOT GOT side Ferrite Core GOT side ao ZCAT3035 1330 es 5 lt 0 a r f o O 130 130 5 12 5 12 230 or less 40 40 230 or less n 9 06 1 57 1 57 9 06 Unit mm inch 5 CC Link IE Feild Network connection Strip the outer insulation layer at both ends of the cable by the length shown below to expose the braided shield for grounding For grounding with cable clamps refer to Section 5 4 3 e Attach ferrite cores to the cable in the positions as illustrated below Ferrite Core GOT side ZCAT3035 1330 Controller side H i 120 or less 4 72 230 or less 40 40 400 or less 9 06 1 57 1 57 15 75 Unit mm inch 5 17 5 4 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant Product 6 Ethernet connection Strip the outer insulation layer at both ends of the cable by the length shown below to expose the braided shield for grounding For grounding with cable clamps refer to Section 5 4 3 e Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the position as illustrated below a When connecting to the Ethernet interface 4 72 230 or less 9 06 40 1 57
7. Unit mm inch d GT1665 GT1662 R Model name A B C D bending radius of the cable GT15 QBUS 95 3 74 50 1 97 55 2 17 GT15 QBUS2 23 0 91 GT15 ABUS 73 5 2 89 28 5 1 12 36 1 42 GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75QBUSL 95 3 74 50 1 97 55 2 17 GT15 75QBUS2L 10 0 39 GT15 75ABUSL 73 5 2 89 28 5 1 12 36 1 42 GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 RS2 9P 2 72 5 2 85 27 5 1 08 GT15 RS4 98 2 30 1 18 GT15 RS4 TE 2 33 5 1 32 0 0 23 0 91 GT15 J71LP23 25 4 45 4 4 GT15 J71BR13 87 5 3 44 1 77 42 5 1 67 30 1 18 GT15 J71GP23 SX 80 3 15 35 1 38 15 0 59 37 1 46 GT15 J71GF13 T2 5 66 2 60 21 0 83 26 1 02 GT15 J61BT13 47 1 85 2 0 08 28 1 10 GT16M V4 132 5 20 87 3 43 20 0 79 GT16M R2 77 3 03 32 1 26 32 1 26 23 0 91 BNC 132 5 20 BNC 87 3 43 BNC 20 0 79 GT16M V4R1 RGB 77 3 03 RGB 32 1 26 RGB 32 1 26 GT16M ROUT 77 3 03 32 1 26 32 1 26 GT16M MMR 132 5 20 87 3 43 37 1 46 20 0 79 GT15 PRN 52 2 05 7 0 28 23 0 91 18 0 71 GT15 CFCD 3 22 0 87 GT15 CFEX CO8SET 120 4 72 75 2 95 55 2 17 GT15 DIO 45 81 3 19 36 1 42 43 1 69 GT15 DIOR 1 77 23 0 91 GT15 SOUT 44 1 73 0 0 30 1 18 Unit mm inch App 8 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES App 9 e GT1655
8. seseessssssessseeirrssttrrrsstttrrsstttrrnnnttnnrnssttnnnnaten nne 5 7 aie y E E E I E E A AE E E A EE EE ovatus 5 7 532 Connection Method ecnescsrsecniareniiare aina AA 5 8 5 3 3 When the communication unit iS used aeeeeeeeeesseeessnnesesrnnesetsnnaaaennnnesttannnaannnnnaastannnaaenenne 5 9 5 3 4 When the option unit iS used 200 0 cece cee ceeeeeeeeeee cee ceeee cece eeeeeeeaacaecceeeeeeeeeeeseesecccecaesaeeeeeeeeeess 5 11 5 3 5 When the Option IS USC wateccccvencesticssnddzandscssdiasccen sends cadaceanad dteavaaane dase ands iaa aidaa naaa iaa 5 11 936 Cable iss csc etdagedeetiiaaadasecesantecdctedetcdats TAEA EEEE EEEE E EEEE EAEEREN EER 5 12 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant Product cceeeeeseeeeeeeneaes 5 13 5 4 1 Power and ground wires wiring Method cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeaaeeeeeeeaeeees 5 13 9 4 2 Processing connection cables iste ccsvedescdevvsgeeccetavendlandey anaia aiia aN a 5 15 5 4 3 Grounding the cable ccc eceeeee eee ceeee teeter eee eerie eee seen ie eee EAAE EEE AAAAE EEE EA AEE EE Ennan EEE Ea neen EEn E a 5 21 6 INSTALLATION 6 1 Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting GOT ssssesssssseiesessrrrssseirrsssrrrrrssttrrnsssenrssstrennssent 6 1 6 2 Panel Cutting Dimensions sesssesseesseesrresetrtnttttt tunnt eater tattu A eee e eee eaaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeaaeeeeeeeenaaees 6 2 63 Mouning Poson se ania E a E a
9. RS 422 conversion unit GT15 RS2T4 9P GT15 RS2T4 25P Ethernet communication unit GT15 J71E71 100 MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 MELSECNET 10 communication unit GT15 75J71LP23 Z GT15 75J71BR13 Z 2 CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit GT15 J71GP23 SX CC Link IE Field Network Communication Unit GT15 J71GF13 T2 CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 GT15 75J61BT13 Z 2 CC Link interface unit GT11HS CCL GT11H CCL Interface converter unit GT15 751F900 Serial multi drop connection unit GT01 RS4 M Connection Conversion Adapter GT10 9PT5S RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter GT14 RS2T4 9P 1 AQGT QJ71LP23 GT15 751F900 set 2 AQGT QJ71BR13 GT15 75IF900 set 3 A8GT J61BT13 GT15 751F900 set E Option unit Abbreviations and generic terms Printer unit GT15 PRN Description Video input unit GT16M V4 GT15V 75V4 RGB input unit GT16M R2 GT15V 75R1 Video RGB unit Video RGB input unit GT16M V4R1 GT15V 75V4R1 RGB output unit GT16M ROUT GT15V 75ROUT Multimedia unit GT16M MMR CF card unit GT15 CFCD CF card extension unit GT15 CFEX CO8SET External I O unit GT15 DIO GT15 DIOR Sound output unit GT15 SOUT GT11 50BAT 1 GT15 CFEX GT15 CFEXIF GT15 CO8CF set E Option Abbreviations and generic terms CF card Memory card
10. 100 000 times Built in clock precision 3 47 to 8 38sec day Operating ambient temperature of 25 cy8 Battery GT15 BAT lithium battery Backup target Clock data maintenance time notification data system status log SRAM user area 500KB Life Approx 5 years Operating ambient temperature of 25 C Continued to next page 3 2 Performance Specifications OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM N z ie Ee prd 9 Ww Ww o Ca PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION Specifications Item GT1685M STBA GT1685M STBD RS 232 1ch Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800 bps RS 232 5 Connector shape D sub 9 pin Male Application For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer Project data read write OS installation FA transparent function RS 422 485 1ch RS 422 485 5 Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800 bps Connector shape 14 pin female Application For communicating with a controller Data transfer method 100BASE TX 10BASE T 1ch Connector shape RJ 45 modular jack Application For communicating with a controller using the gateway function or connecting a personal computer Project data read write FA transparent function MES interface function Ethernet Built in interface USB Full Speed 12Mbps Host 1ch Connec
11. For protective sheet For protective sheet f i p covered USB environmental protection cover type 3 Make sure to fit the sheet on the GOT without wrinkles or air between the sheet and the GOT For protective sheet For protective sheet i i P covered USB environmental protection cover type 4 Remove the protective film from the protective sheet When the user continues using the GOT with the protective film the film may not be removed OPTION 8 3 Option 8 15 Precautions for using the protective sheet covered USB environmental protection cover type When the protective sheet covered USB environmental protection cover type is used the USB interface on the GOT front face cannot be used NT Replacement time of protective sheet Check the status of the protection sheet visually by to the daily inspection The visibility becomes worse when there is too much dirt and cracks causing malfunction Proceeds replacement promptly 8 16 8 3 Option E Protective cover for oil Before attaching protective cover for oil For attaching the protective cover for oil to the GOT already mounted on the control panel follow the procedures as below e Remove the GOT from the control panel Make sure to externally shut off all phases of the power supply and remove all cables from the GOT in advance e Clean dirt off surfaces of the GOT and control panel 1 Position the POWER LED frame
12. Lightning surge absorber 1 Separate the grounding of the lightning surge absorber E1 from the grounding of the GOT E2 2 Select an appropriate lightning surge absorber so that the supply voltage does not exceed the maximum allowable circuit voltage of the surge absorber even when it rises to the maximum 7 1 Power Supply Wiring 7 2 Wiring to GOT Power Section This section provides an example for connecting power cables and ground cables to the power terminals situated on the back of the GOT rt oz Ww gt re 3 In the case of 100VAC INPUT i 100 0VAC aa O Wir LS HO In the case of 24VDC GT1695 GT1685 GOT GT1675 GT1672 GT1665 n GT1662 Zz O ie ie Ee i 3 U O W Q n In the case of 24VDC GT1655 a lt W Sn EAO Ze pE o Ground cables L Grounding Bi u a POINT 225 a ogg aS6 1 Precautions for wiring to the power supply section e For 100V AC 200V AC or 24V DC cable use the thickest cable as possible Max 2mm and start twisting them at the position closest to the connected terminals To prevent a short circuit due to loose screws use the solderless terminal with insulation sleeve z e When connection is made between LG and FG terminals be sure to connect them to the ground 2 Otherwise the system becomes susceptible to noise 5 Since the LG terminal has potential equal to a half
13. 7 Turn the CF card access switch of the GOT off For other than GT1655 For GT1655 2 Open the cover of the CF card interface Insert and install the CF card into the CF card interface with its front side outside For other than GT1655 For GT1655 CF Card top face 3 Close the cover of the CF card interface Set the CF card access switch to ON For other than GT1655 For GT1655 OPTION 8 3 Option 8 7 b Removing Set the CF card access switch of the GOT to OFF and make sure that the CF card access LED turns off When the CF card access LED turns off the CF card can be removed even during the GOT power on For other than GT1655 For GT1655 2 Open the cover of the CF card interface For other than GT1655 For GT1655 Press the CF card eject button and then the button pops out 3 Push the CF card eject button of the GOT to lift the CF card and remove it For other than GT1655 For GT1655 8 3 Option Precautions for removing the CF card 1 While the CF card access LED is on do not install remove the CF card or power off the GOT To do so may cause data corruption or malfunction 2 When ejecting the CF card support it by hand since it may pop out Failure to do so may cause a fall of
14. Category IV Category III Category II Category Installation Category Category II indicates a power supply whose voltage has been reduced by two or more levels of isolating transformers from the public power distribution 5 2 Requirements for Conpliance with the Low Voltage Directive 5 2 3 Control panel Because the GOT is open type equipment device designed to be stored within another device be sure to use it only when installed in a control panel 1 Shock protection In order to prevent those who are unfamiliar with power facility e g an operator from getting a shock make sure to take the following measures on the control panel OVERVIEW a Store the GOT within the control panel locked and allow only those who are familiar with power facility to unlock the panel b Build the structure in order that the power supply will be shut off when the control panel is opened 2 Dustproof and waterproof features The control panel also provides protection from dust water and other substances Insufficient ingression protection may lower the insulation withstand voltage resulting in insulation destruction The insulation in the GOT is designed to cope with the pollution level 2 so use in an environment with pollustion level 2 or better CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Pollution level1 An environment where the air is dry and conductive dust does not exist Pollution level2 An environment where conductive dust does not u
15. Fix the attachment to the control panel with four clamp screws in the torque range of 0 2 to 0 28N m Place the GOT into the attachment from the front and fix it by tightening the mounting screws included with the GOT in the torque range of 0 36 to 0 48Nem 8 3 Option 8 20 2 GT15 70ATT 87 GT15 50ATT 95W GT15 50ATT 85 Model 7 The model is indicated on the attachment The position of the model indication does not affect the performance of A the attachment Upper part Example of model indication Lower part 2 Remove two sided tapes from the rear face of the attachment 3 Fix the attachment to fit the mouting hole on the control panel If the control panel is dirty the attachment might fall causing an injury Wipe the control panel and then install the attachment 4 Place the GOT into the attachment from the front and fix it by tightening the mounting screws included with the GOT in the torque range of 0 36 to 0 48N m Precautions for installing the attachment The attachment can be used when the mounting panel thickness is 2 to 3mm If the installation panel thickness exceeds 3mm the GOT cannot be replaced by using the attachment e Replacing GOT with the attachment does not compliant with the standard IP65 IP67 NEMA4 of the waterproof and dustproof OPTION 8 3 Option 8 21 8 4 Cable Cables are used for connecting the GOT to a PLC temperature controller etc Refer to
16. GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S GT15 RS4 TE Version D or later Jan 2006 Inverter connection GT15 RS2T4 9P Version A or later GT15 RS4 9S Version D or later Jan 2006 Servo amplifier connection GOT RS 232 interface GT15 RS2T4 9P Version A or later GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S Version D or later Jan 2006 CNC connection GOT RS 232 interface GT15 RS2T4 9P Version A or later GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S Version D or later Jan 2006 GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 GT15 J61BT13 GOT Ethernet interface Version C or later Sep 2006 MODBUS RTU connection GOT RS 232 interface GOT RS 422 485 interface GT15 RS2T4 9P Version A or later VOLTAGE GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S Version D or later Jan 2006 MODBUS TCP connection GOT Ethernet interface 5 3 EMC Directive Compliant System Configuration OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS Ww 2 O W INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 5 3 4 When the option unit is used To meet the EMC Directive use the following option units When an option unit other than below is used it does not meet the EMC Directive Product name Model name Hardware version of option unit Production year and month Video input unit Version B or later Jan 2009 GT16M V4 F Version E or later Oct 2009 2 RGB i
17. STARTUP MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS A WARNING Correctly connect the battery connector Do not perform the following actions to the battery e Charging disassembling heating short circuiting or soldering the battery or throwing it into the fire Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat explode or ignite resulting in injuly and fire Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening always switch off the power externally in all phases Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify this unit Doing so can cause a failure malfunction injury or fire Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault When unplugging the cable connected to the unit do not hold and pull the cable portion Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault Do not drop the module or subject it to strong shock A module damage may r
18. Dedicated printer connection cable 1 Model name GT09 C30USB 5P Cable length 3m Description For connecting GOT USB mini to printer USB 1 Included with an option unit at the time of purchase E Stand Sold separately Product name Stand Model name GT15 90STAND Description Stand for 15 GT15 80STAND Stand for 12 1 GT15 70STAND Stand for 10 4 8 4 GT05 50STAND E Battery Sold separately Product name Battery GT15 BAT Stand for 5 7 Target GOT GT1695 GT1685 GT1675 Battery for clock data and maintenance report GT1672 GT1665 GT1662 data backups GT11 50BAT GT1655 4 Included with the main unit 2 2 Component List 2 15 OVERVIEW z Q He prd 5 o WL z O re SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 2 16 E Protective sheet Sold separately Product name Protective sheet 1 The USB interface on the GOT fron Model name GT16 90PSCB GT16 90PSGB GT16 90PSCW GT16 90PSGW GT16 90PSCB 012 15 protective sheet Description Clear 5 sheets Antiglare 5 sheets Clear Frame white 5 sheets Antiglare Frame white 5 sheets Clear covered USB environmental protection cover type 5 sheets GT16 80PSCB GT16 80PSGB GT16 80PSCW GT16 80PSGW
19. Error occurred in the specified file register when executing the recipe function by specifying the file register name 356 File system error occurred in e Execute the recipe function again after confirming the file register x PLC Confirm file register name e Execute the recipe function again after formatting the PC memory in the specified PLC CPU drive with GX Developer When executing the recipe function specifying the file register name error occurred in PLC CPU drive 357 Error in specified PLC drive e Execute the recipe function again after confirming the specified PLC x Confirm PLC drive CPU drive e Execute the recipe function again after formatting the PC memory in the specified PLC CPU drive with GX Developer When the recipe function is executed specifying the file register name PLC CPU file register could not be accessed e Execute the recipe function again after confirming the specified PLC F CPU drive file register name When you specify drive 0 execute the PLC file access failure Confirm f 358 PLC drive recipe function again after changing to other drives x ive e Confirm whether the CF card or USB memory are write protected and execute the recipe function again e Confirm that the security key is not set on the specified CPU and execute the recipe function again When the recipe function is executed specifying the file register name Processing from another other peripherals carry out the proce
20. Installation Procedure cseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 10 L Large size CPU extension cable 05 2 6 M Memory card adaptot c cccceeeeeeetee 2 14 8 12 0 OPTION ticari aad aai Aa E 2 5 Option function board 1 0 cece cece ce eee seen eee 2 14 8 13 Overall configuration e ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 2 1 P Packing uiSts cccaviccie cs scetsiceleiel narnia A 24 Panel cutting dimensions 6 2 Part Names and Settings of the GT1655 4 9 Part Names and Settings of the GT1665 GOTICO 2an tite Mars eaeiiaiialdlaars 4 7 Part Names and Settings of the GT1675 GT AG Z sc csncosse ccesatenes cess A EE AEO 4 5 Part names and settings of the GT1685 4 3 Part names and settings of the GT1695 4 1 PC connection Cable cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 18 Performance specifications cceeeeeeeeees 3 2 Periodic inSpection ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseenees 9 2 Power supply WILING ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeenaes 7 2 GOUGING ess aed abides 7 4 Wiring FG cable of bus connection cable 7 10 Wiring to GOT power section eeeeeeeee 7 3 Protective cover for Oil cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 8 17 Protective Sheet cccceececeeeesesseeeeeeeeeees 2 16 8 15 Q Q extension Cable eenid 2 6 Q long distance connection cable 2 0 005 2 6 QCPU Q mode
21. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EST GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GO Toop GT16 User s Manual Hardware SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Always read these precautions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product In this manual the safety precautions are ranked as WARNING and CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury A WARNING aN CAUTION conditions resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage were egg KKK KW I I I I I Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous I I I J Note that the N caution level may lead to a serious accident according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user DESIGN PRECAUTIONS N WARNING Some failures of the GOT communication unit or cable may keep the outputs on or off Some failures of a touch panel may cause malfunction of the input objects such as a touch switch An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a serious ac
22. Reset switch PACMAG reset el A F sia ows Inoperative in the bus connection or with the bus connection unit installed E 2 5 Fw 19 Hole for unit installation fitting Hole for inserting the unit installation fitting Q 8 ES w 20 Battery cover Houses the battery 21 Human sensor Sensor that detects human movement 22 Installation switch Used for OS installations at the GOT startup zZ O KB he T Hinr G no zZ Connector used for the RS 232 interface The specification of the connector used for the RS 232 interface of GT1685 is as follows Manufacturer DDK Ltd Model name 17LE 23090 27 D4CK or equivalent product Connector used for the RS 422 485 interface o The specification of the connector used for the RS 422 485 interface of GT1685 is as follows Z Manufacturer Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co Ltd Model name HDR EC14LFDT1 SLE or equivalent product zZ Q H o O 4 2 Part Names and Settings of the GT1685 4 4 4 3 Part Names and Settings of the GT1675 GT1672 U i 10 11 20 18 m
23. ty A g 4 l 320 12 60 ojs E Aal A EEL Ls ALA LU eee STOcoo0 10 L 382 15 03 J 10 0 39 0 39 Unit mm inch 2 GT1685 316 12 44 240 9 48 227 8 94 242 9 53 240 9 48 52 2 05 301 11 85 Unit mm inch App 2 3 GT1675 GT1672 303 11 93 g 252 9 92 g O Sf m oO oO lt gt L S ron fr o O n N DU d a 222 8 74 e N o J ROT niaii Ha 2 g Worle eeu 5 3 r 8 L 288 11 34 Unit mm inch 4 GT1665 GT1662 241 9 49 175 5 6 91 ise 2 l wh goles a o St oo N D o De 2 L r A pm 175 5 6 91 5 N o S n 1 n lt Iz eeir a HERE N o ite 226 8 90 Unit mm inch App 3 5 GT1655 Tl 120 4 72 __10 0 39 167 6 57 116 4 57 S so 3
24. 0 z POINT Precautions for use USB environment cover When the USB environmental protection cover is closed the USB interface complies with the protective structure IP67 In this case the USB environmental protection cover must be fixed by pushing the A mark on the latch firmly Environmental protective structure of USB interface is IP2X when the USB environmental cover is opened z O a e 8 3 Option 8 19 E Stand f Set the stand so that the front side of the GOT to be mounted faces the front 2 Adjust the mounting angle of GOT with the angle adjusting screw of the stand 3 Put the GOT into the Stand from the front side and fix it using the fixtures For the GOT mounting method refer to the following lt gt 6 5 Installation Procedure E Attachment 1 GT15 70ATT 98 GT15 60ATT 97 GT15 60ATT 96 GT15 60ATT 87 GT15 60ATT 77 The following figures show an example of the GT15 60ATT 97 installation Follow the same procedure for installing the other models fi Model The model is indicated on the attachment The upper part of the attachment has the model indication Example of model indication Upper part Upper GF part Lower part Lower part Hang the two upper hooks on the upper part over the mounting holes in the control panel Refer to the figure shown in step1 S While lifting the attachment upward hang the two lower hooks on the lower part of the control panel
25. 05 09 00AF or later e Standard monitor OS version 05 09 00 or later With OSs earlier than the above versions the GOT cannot correctly recognize the USB memory and the CF card that store more than 2GB If the above versions of OSs are not installed install the OSs on the GOT by using GT Designer3 with version 1 17T or later GT Designer2 version is not compatible with a USB memory and a CF card that store more than 2GB Top Bottom Left Right 88 degrees for function version C or earlier 450 cd m for function version C or earlier 2 1kg for function version C or earlier For function version G or earlier refer to the following Display angle of the display section Left Right Top Bottom 88 degrees Display section life Approx 43 000 h operating ambient temperature 25 C Backlight Cold cathode fluorescent tube replaceable Backlight life Approx 50 000 h or more For function version G or earlier refer to the following Left Right 45 degrees Top 30 degrees Bottom 20 degrees 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 2 4 GT1665M S GT1665M V GT1662 VN Specifications Item GT1665M STBA GT1665M VTBA GT1662 VNBA GT1665M STBD GT1665M VTBD GT1662 VNBD Type TFT color liquid crystal display High intensity and wide angle view TFT color liquid crystal display Screen size 8 4 Resolution 800 x 600 dots 640 x 480 dots Display size 171 6 73 W X
26. 40 4 72 400 or less 1 57 15 75 GOT side Ferrite Core PLC ZCAT3035 1 330 personal computer side ea a 120 or less Unit mm inch b When connecting to the multimedia unit GT16M MMR Ferrite Core a ZCAT3035 1330 on a GOT side Personal computer side 230 or less 9 06 Unit mm inch 1 57 7 External I O device connection Strip the outer insulation layer at both ends of the cable by the length shown below to expose the braided shield for grounding For grounding with cable clamps Refer to Section 5 4 3 Connect the braided shield to the connector with the connector cover Twist power cables GOT side External I O device side Braided shield Connector cover Power cable 360 or less 14 17 40 1 57 360 or less 14 17 Unit mm inch 5 4 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant Product 5 18 SYSTEM PART NAME AND SETTINGS VOLTAGE OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SPECIFICATIONS w 2 He S D x a INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 8 Video RGB connection a Video input e Peel the sheath with the length shown below at both ends of the cable and expose the shield braided wire for grounding For grounding with cable clamps refer to Section 5 4 3 Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the position as illustrated below
27. 5 1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive 5 4 5 2 Requirements for Conpliance with the Low Voltage Directive The Low Voltage Directive requires each device which operates with power supply ranging from 50VAC to 1000V and 75VDC to 1500V to satisfy necessary safety items In the Sections from 5 2 1 to 5 2 5 cautions on installation and wiring of the GOT to conform to the Low Voltage Directive requires are described We have put the maximum effort to develop this material based on the requirements and standards of the Directive that we have collected However compatibility of the devices which are fabricated according to the contents of this manual to the above Directive is not guaranteed Each manufacturer who fabricates such device should make the final judgement about the application method of the Low Voltage Directive and the product compatibility 5 2 1 Standard subject to GOT 5 Standard applied to GOT EEN61131 2 Programmable controllers Equipment requirements and tests EN60950 1 Safety of Information Technology Equipment 2 2 Power supply The insulation specification of the GOT was designed assuming installation category II Be sure to use the installation category power supply to the GOT The installation category indicates the durability level against surge voltage generated by lightning strike Category has the lowest durability category IV has the highest durability lt 4 gt lt 4 gt lt 4 gt gt
28. 6 INSTALLATION Panel cut Protectivecover A dimensions for oil Mounting metal fixture Control panel Precautions for protective cover for oil The protective cover for oil is a consumable product Check the cover for scratch damage or dirt at regular intervals and replace with new one if necessary Do not push the protective cover for oil with pointed tools including mechanical pencils and screwdrivers Doing so causes scratches and damages of the cover Do not clean the protective cover for oil with bleaches thinners organic solvents corrosive chemicals and others Doing so causes changes in shape and color of the cover When the protective cover for oil is attached to the GOT do not stretch and bend the cover too much Doing so may cause a separation between the sheet and rubber Do not place or use the protective cover for oil in direct sunshine When the protective cover for oil gets dusts wipe the dusts off with a damp cloth When the protective cover for oil is used the USB interface on the GOT front face cannot be used When the protective cover for oil is used the human sensor does not correctly operate Disable the human sensor with the utility For the human sensor setting refer to GT16 User s Manual L gt Basic Utility 2 2 3 Display setting operations Do not attach and remove the protective cover for oil frequently Doing so reduces oil resistance and chemical resistance This cover does
29. Description GT05 MEM 16MC GT05 MEM 32MC GT05 MEM 64MC GT05 MEM 128MC GT05 MEM 256MC GT05 MEM 512MC GT05 MEM 1GC GT05 MEM 2GC GT05 MEM 4GC GT05 MEM 8GC GT05 MEM 16GC SD card L1MEM 2GBSD L1MEM 4GBSD Memory card adaptor GT05 MEM ADPC Option function board GT16 MESB GT15 FNB GT15 QFNB GT15 QFNB16M GT15 QFNB32M GT15 QFNB48M GT15 MESB48M GT11 50FNB Battery GT15 BAT GT11 50BAT Protective Sheet GT16 90PSCB GT16 90PSGB GT16 90PSCW GT16 90PSGW GT16 80PSCB GT16 80PSGB GT16 80PSCW GT16 80PSGW GT16 70PSCB GT16 70PSGB GT16 70PSCW GT16 70PSGW For GT16 GT16 60PSCB GT16 60PSGB GT16 60PSCW GT16 60PSGW GT16 50PSCB GT16 50PSGB GT16 50PSCW GT16 50PSGW GT16 90PSCB 012 GT16 80PSCB 012 GT16 70PSCB 012 GT16 60PSCB 012 GT16 50PSCB 012 GT16H 60PSC GT15 90PSCB GT15 90PSGB GT15 90PSCW GT15 90PSGW GT15 80PSCB GT15 80PSGB GT15 80PSCW GT15 80PSGW For GT15 GT15 70PSCB GT15 70PSGB GT15 70PSCW GT15 70PSGW GT15 60PSCB GT15 60PSGB GT15 60PSCW GT15 60PSGW GT15 50PSCB GT15 50PSGB GT15 50PSCW GT15 50PSGW For GT14 GT14 50PSCB GT14 50PSGB GT14 50PSCW GT14 50PSGW For GT12 GT11 70PSCB GT11 65PSCB For GT11 GT11 50PSCB GT11 50PSGB GT11 50PSCW GT11 50PSGW GT11H 50PSC GT10 50PSCB GT10 50PSGB GT10 50PSCW GT10 50PSGW GT10 40PSCB GT10 40PSGB GT10 40PSCW GT10 40PSGW GT10 30PSCB GT10 30PSGB GT10 30PSCW GT10 30PSGW GT10 20PSCB GT10 20PSGB GT10 20PSCW GT1
30. E Connecting a controller to the GOT Obtaining information of Mitsubishi products applicable to the GOT Connecting Mitsubishi products to the GOT GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for Connecting multiple controllersto one GOT Multi channel function GT Works3 Establishing communication between a personal computer and a controller via the GOT FA transparent function Obtaining information of Non Mitsubishi products applicable to the GOT e GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 1 for GT Works3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Connecting Non Mitsubishi products to the GOT Products 2 for GT Works3 Obtaining information of peripheral devices applicable to the GOT GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Microcomputer 7 MODBUS Products Peripherals for GT Works3 Connecting peripheral devices including a barcode reader to the GOT E Transferring data to the GOT Writing data to the GOT GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Reading data from the GOT Fundamentals 1 2 2 2 Verifying a editing project to a GOT project E Others Obtaining specifications including part names external dimensions and e GT16 User s Manual Hardware options of each GOT GT16 Handy GOT User s Manual e GT15 User s Manual e GT14 User s Manual e GT12 User s Manual Installing the GOT GT11 User s Manual GT11 Handy GOT User s Manual GT10 U
31. Extension unit 5 For communication unit option unit mounting 2ch Buzzer output Single tone tone length adjustable Outside the enclosure IP67 4 Inside the enclosure IP2X Protective structure External dimensions 303 11 93 W x 214 8 43 H x 49 1 93 D mm inch Panel cutting dimensions 289 11 38 W x 200 7 87 H mm inch EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE Weight mounting fixtures are not included 2 1kg 4 6lb 2 3kg 5 1Ib 12 2 3kg 5 1Ib GT Designer3 Version1 01B or later C tible softw k GT Desi 3 Version1 17T or lat ompatible software package GT Designer2 Version2 96A or later esigner3 Version or later INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 9 3 10 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Bright dots always lit and dark dots unlit may appear on a liquid crystal display panel due to its characteristics It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect The GOT screen saving backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the display screen and increases the backlight life ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is
32. GT01 RS4 M GOT multidrop connection unit 2 2 Component List 2 5 OVERVIEW 4 fe lt 4 9 me z e amp SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION E QCPU Q Mode bus connection cable Sold separately Product name Q extension cable GOT to GOT connection cable Description For connecting QCPU and GOT For connecting GOT and GOT Model name GT15 QC06B Cable length 0 6m GT15 QC12B Cable length 1 2m GT15 QC30B Cable length 3m GT15 QC50B Cable length 5m GT15 QC100B Cable length 10m Q long distance connection cable GOT to GOT long distance connection cable GT15 QC150BS Cable length 15m GT15 QC200BS Cable length 20m For long distance connection 13 2m or longer of GT15 QC250BS Cable length 25m QCPU and GOT A9GT QCNB is necessary GT15 QC300BS Cable length 30m For long distance connection of GOT and GOT GT15 QC350BS Cable length 35m E QnA ACPU Motion controller A series bus connection cable Sold separately Product name Small size CPU extension cable GOT to GOT connection cable Model name GT15 A1SC07B Cable length 0 7m GT15 A1SC12B Cable length 1 2m GT15 A1SC30B Cable length 3m Description For connecting QnAS AnSCPU Motion controller CPU A series and GOT GT15 A1SC50B Cable length
33. GT16 80PSCB 012 GT16 70PSCB GT16 70PSGB GT16 70PSCW GT16 70PSGW GT16 70PSCB 012 12 1 protective sheet 10 4 protective sheet Clear 5 sheets Antiglare 5 sheets Clear Frame white 5 sheets Antiglare Frame white 5 sheets Clear covered USB environmental protection cover type 5 sheets Clear 5 sheets Antiglare 5 sheets Clear Frame white 5 sheets Antiglare Frame white 5 sheets Clear covered USB environmental protection cover type 5 sheets GT16 60PSCB GT16 60PSGB GT16 60PSCW GT16 60PSGW GT16 60PSCB 012 8 4 protective sheet Clear 5 sheets Antiglare 5 sheets Clear Frame white 5 sheets Antiglare Frame white 5 sheets Clear covered USB environmental protection cover type 5 sheets GT16 50PSCB GT16 50PSGB GT16 50PSCW GT16 50PSGW GT16 50PSCB 012 5 7 protective sheet Clear 5 sheets Antiglare 5 sheets Clear Frame white 5 sheets Antiglare Frame white 5 sheets Clear covered USB environmental protection cover type 5 sheets face cannot be used with this item E Protective cover for oil Sold separately Product name Protective cover for oil Model name Description GT05 90PCO For 15 GOT GT05 80PCO For 12 1 GOT GT05 70PCO For 10 4 GOT GT05 60PCO For 8 4 GOT GT16 50PCO For 5 7 GOT 2 2 Component List E Backlig
34. GT16 MESB Product name Description Memory card adaptor CF card to memory card Type II conversion adaptor Product name Description Option function board MES interface function boad 2 14 2 2 Component List Option unit Sold separately Product name Model name Description Video input unit GT16M V4 For video input signal NTSC format PAL format 4 channels RGB input unit GT16M R2 For analog RGB input signal 2 channels Video RGB input unit GTI6M V4R1 For video input signal NTSC format PAL format 4 channels analog RGB input signal 1 channels mixed input RGB output unit GT16M ROUT For analog RGB output signal 1 channel Multimedia unit GT16M MMR For video input signal NTSC format PAL format 1 channel Printer unit GT15 PRN For connecting a printer USB slave PictBridge 1 channel CF card unit GT15 CFCD For CF card installation B drive CF card extention unit GT15 CFEX CO8SET For CF card installation B drive For connecting an external I O device operation panel Positive Common Input GT15 DIO i Sink Type Output External I O unit For connecting an external I O device operation panel Negative Common Input GT15 DIOR Source Type Output Sound output unit GT15 SOUT For sound output 1 The GT1675 VN GT1672 VN GT1662 VN GT1655 V cannot be used E Option unit dedicated cable Sold separately Product name
35. GT16M MMR 132 5 20 18 0 71 19 5 0 77 20 0 79 GT15 PRN 52 2 05 0 0 18 0 71 18 5 0 73 GT15 CFCD GT15 CFEX CO8SET 120 4 72 6 0 24 55 2 17 GT15 DIO 114 81 3 19 19 5 0 77 43 1 69 GT15 DIOR 4 49 0 0 GT15 SOUT 44 1 73 30 1 18 Unit mm inch b GT1685 R Model name A B C D bending radius of the cable GT15 QBUS 95 3 74 31 1 22 55 2 17 GT15 QBUS2 18 0 71 GT15 ABUS 73 5 2 89 9 5 0 37 36 1 42 GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75QBUSL 95 3 74 31 1 22 55 2 17 GT15 75QBUS2L 5 0 20 GT15 75ABUSL 73 5 2 89 9 5 0 37 36 1 42 GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 RS2 9P 2 72 5 2 85 8 5 0 33 GT15 RS4 98 2 30 1 18 GT15 RS4 TE 33 5 1 32 0 0 18 0 71 GT15 J71LP23 25 4 64 4 4 GT15 J71BR13 87 5 3 44 2 52 23 5 0 93 30 1 18 GT15 J71GP23 SX 80 3 15 16 0 63 15 0 59 32 1 26 GT15 J71GF13 T2 5 66 2 60 2 0 08 26 1 02 GT15 J61BT13 47 1 85 0 0 28 1 10 GT16M V4 132 5 20 68 2 68 20 0 79 GT16M R2 77 3 03 13 0 51 32 1 26 18 0 71 BNC 132 5 20 BNC 68 2 68 BNC 20 0 79 GT16M V4R1 RGB 77 3 03 RGB 13 0 51 RGB 32 1 26 GT16M ROUT 77 3 03 13 0 51 32 1 26 GT16M MMR 132 5 20 68 2 68 32 1 26 20 0 79 GT15 PRN 52 2 05 0 0 18 0 71 18 0 71 GT15 CFCD F A 17 0 67 GT15 CFEX CO8SET 120 4 72 56 2 20 55 2 17 GT15 DIO 64 81 3 19 17 0 67 43 1 6
36. High intensity and wide angle view Screen size 15 Resolution 1 024 x 768 dots Display size 304 1 12 0 W x 228 1 8 98 H mm inch 16 dot standard font 64 characters x 48 lines 2byte character Display Display character 4 12 dot standard font 85 characters x 64 lines 2byte character section Display color 65536 colors Display angle Left Right 80 degrees Top 60 degrees Bottom 80 degrees Intensity of LCD only 450 cd m Intensity adjustment 8 level adjustment Life Approx 52 000 h Operating ambient temperature 25 C LED irreplaceable 1 backlight shutoff detection function is included Backlight wee Backlight off screen saving time can be set Life Approx 60 000 h or longer a Time when display luminance reaches 50 at the operating ambient temperature of 25 C Type Analog resistive film Key size Minimum 2 X 2 dots per key Touch 7 Number of objects that can be Simultaneous presses not allowed panel simultaneously touched Only 1 point can be touched Life 1 million times or more operating force 0 98N max Detection length 1 39 37 m inch Human Detection range Left Right Top Bottom 70 degrees sensor Detection delay time 0 to 4s Detection temperature Temperature difference between human body and ambient air 4 C or higher Continued to next page 3 2 3 2 Performance Specifications Specifications Item GT1695M XTBA GT1695M XTBD C drive Built in flash
37. In such a case install the ground cable or communication cable apart from the load If the ground cable or communication cable has to be installed close to the load unavoidably attaching a surge suppressor is effective Attach the surge suppressor at the position closest to the load The GOT s ground cable and communication cable must not be installed close to the load Output equipment such as PLC s output module rc 7 1 I 1 I 1 1 I The surge suppressor must be attached close to the load Measures for AC inductive load The GOT s ground cable and communication cable must not be installed close to the load Output equipment such as PLC s output module The surge suppressor must be attached close to the load Measures for DC inductive load 1 o 7 5 Attaching Surge Suppressor for Control Equipment 7 6 Grounding Extension Units 7 6 1 Wiring FG cable of bus connection cable This section describes wiring of the FG cable when a PLC CPU is connected to the GOT Cable connected to the PLC CPU Do not install the connection cable together with the main circuit lines high voltage large current or I O signal lines E When connecting QCPU or motion controller CPU Q series to the GOT Grounding of the FG cable for QCPU and motion controller CPU Q series is not necessary since they have no FG wire E When connecting QnACPU ACPU or motion controller CPU A series to the GOT When using
38. p 116 4 5760 l x Q Ko 86888 8890888 N i L gt e 152 5 98 E _ Unit mm inch App 4 App 5 6 Depth dimension and cable bending dimensions of the GOT with extension unit GOT rear face GOT side face 100 3 94 GOT type Dimension of z or more GT1695 55 2 17 GY GT1685 46 1 81 GT1675 43 1 69 GT1672 GT1665 46 1 81 Extension unit GT1662 x p GT1655 54 2 13 e a Other equipment Unit mm inch a GT1695 R Model name A B C p A bending radius of the cable GT15 QBUS 95 3 74 55 2 17 GT15 QBUS2 19 5 0 77 GT15 ABUS 73 5 2 89 36 1 42 GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75QBUSL 95 3 74 55 2 17 GT15 75QBUS2L 010 0 6 5 0 26 GT15 75ABUSL 73 5 2 89 36 1 42 GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 RS2 9P 2 A 72 5 2 85 GT15 RS4 9S 2 30 1 18 GT15 RS4 TE 2 33 5 1 32 19 5 0 77 GT15 J71LP23 25 4 114 4 4 GT15 J71BR13 87 5 3 44 4 49 30 1 18 GT15 J71GP23 SX 80 3 15 15 0 59 0 0 33 5 1 32 GT15 J71GF13 T2 5 66 2 60 26 1 02 GT15 J61BT13 47 1 85 28 1 10 GT16M V4 132 5 20 18 0 71 20 0 79 GT16M R2 77 3 03 0 0 19 5 0 77 32 1 26 BNC 132 5 20 BNC 18 0 71 BNC 20 0 79 GT16M V4R1 RGB 77 3 03 RGB 0 0 RGB 32 1 26 GT16M ROUT 77 3 03 0 0 33 5 1 32 32 1 26
39. 128 5 04 H mm inch 16 dot standard font 50 characters Xx 37 lines 2byte character 16 dot standard font 40 characters x 30 lines 2byte character Display character A Display 12 dot standard font 66 12 dot standard font 53 characters x 40 lines 2byte character characters Xx 50 lines 2byte section character Display color 65536 colors 16 colors 10 Left Right Top Bottom 80 degrees Display angle Left Right Top Bottom 80 degrees 14 Intensity of LCD only 400 cd m 500 cd m 2 10 200 cd m Intensity adjustment 8 level adjustment 4 level adjustment Life Approx 43 000 h Operating ambient temperature 25 C Backlight LED irreplaceable 10 backlight shutoff detection function is included Backlight off screen saving time can be set Approx 60 000 h or longer Approx 60 000 h or longer 1 Time when display Life 2 Time when display luminance reaches 50 at the operating ambient luminance reaches 50 at temperature of 25 C the operating ambient temperature of 25 C Type Analog resistive film Key size Minimum 2 x 2 dots per key Touch panel Number of objects that can be Simultaneous presses not allowed simultaneously touched Only 1 point can be touched Life 8 1 million times or more operating force 0 98N max Detection length None Human Detection range None Sensor Detection delay time None Detection temperature None C drive Built in flash memory 15Mbytes for storing project data and OS Built
40. 2 13 C CC Link communication Unit 0 eee 2 5 8 1 CC Link IE controller network communication UUM SRE EEE AAE E E EA E 2 5 8 1 CECI Gs aae ae a E R 2 13 8 7 CF card extension uniit cceeceeeeeeeeteeeeeees 6 1 Clean Cleaning Method 9 3 Communication UNnit ccecccceceeesseeeeeeeeaees 2 5 8 1 Applicable communication unit e 8 1 Component NISticceiessaciccdideracadeceesvanaszeesnssandsadsnstanncd 2 2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed SUAMGANGS 2425 sedascainecs Metiasranetcaasaaatseecantnaddeans App 14 Connection cables for MITSUBISHI PLCs 2 7 Control panel inside temperature and MOUNTING ANGIE essrrnusenens 6 10 D Daily INSPECTION ee ceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeenaaees 9 2 Dedicated printer connection cable 2 15 Drawing SOftWALEC 0 eceeceeeeeeteeeeeeeesteeeeeeeeaaees 2 18 E EMC and Low Voltage Directive eee 5 1 Error message and system alarm 00 10 15 Explanation of the GOT model name 55 2 2 Explanation of the option model name 2 2 External dimensions 0 cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeees App 1 G General specifications seeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 1 GOT to GOT connection cable cccceee 2 6 GOT to GOT long distance connection cable 2 6 GT Designer cit seideseavacedeadhdetaspihedeeensinie 2 18 l
41. 3 3 10 10 33 20 66 30 98 Fig 14 GT10 CO R4 8P 1 3 3 10 10 33 20 66 30 98 Fig 15 GT10 CLIR4 25P 3 10 10 33 20 66 30 98 Fig 16 GT10 C10R4 8PL 1 3 Fig 17 16 50 Unit mm inch Fan 15 455 200 38 8 0 59 j 7 87 ae 0 31 3000 53 ge lt gt 0 63 O7 118 11 2 09 i _H0 63 set 5 0 20 lt 5 re L 3810 Uj 7 m ig TH e708 ji o Q p 3 E B P te 16 50 L E 16 50 L 40 13 0 63 1 97 2 09 0 63 1 97 gt lt 1 57 gt 0 51 Sa 7 0 28 S ste 6 0 24 oF foy ld SS 7 ld HI if al ai Tiran DE ois Bl toy qos mel Byte dee 25 0 98 A a x 33 1 30 ea 30 meo a8 ii 2o 16 1 18 250 1 1 57 i 250 j 9 84 i 9 84 7 0 63 i 013 P T i 0 51 D BG 7 0 28 25 0 98 7 0 28 25 0 98 diz x33 1 30 x33 1 30 30 1000 38 T 39 4 250 1 50 0 84 a J g 7 0 28 25 0 98 X33 1 30 13 0 51 App 12 c External dimensions of RS 232 conversion cable connector Cable model Cable length m ft
42. 3 94 Unit mm inch 3 For MELSECNETI H connection PLC to PLC network a For coaxial cable Strip the outer insulation layer at both ends of the cable by the length shown below to expose the outer braided shield for grounding For grounding with cable clamps refer to Section 5 4 3 e Attach ferrite cores to the cable in the positions as illustrated below Wu lt 4 fa gt GOT side Ferrite Core f oo ZCAT3035 1330 Bai 3 130 or 130 or less less 5 12 5 12 230 or less 40 40 400 or less 9 06 1 57 1 57 15 75 Unit mm inch b For optical fiber cable e Processing of the cable is not required 5 4 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant Product 5 16 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS w 2 E S Ww x a INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 4 CC Link connection Intelligent device station Strip the outer insulation layer at both ends of the cable by the length shown below to expose the braided shield for grounding For grounding with cable clamps refer to Section 5 4 3 e Attach ferrite cores to the cable in the positions as illustrated below e CC Link dedicated cable for connecting the GOT and PLC GOT side Ferrite Core PLC side a ZCAT3035 1330 i
43. 5m For connecting QnAS AnSCPU and GOT GT15 A1SCO5NB Cable length 0 45m GT15 A1SC0O7NB Cable length 0 7m GT15 A1SC30NB Cable length 3m For connecting QnAS AnSCPU motion controller CPU A series and A7GT CNB GT15 A1SC50NB Cable length 5m For connecting QnAS AnSCPU and A7GT CNB Large size CPU extension cable GT15 C12NB Cable length 1 2m For connecting QnA ACPU Motion controller GT15 C30NB Cable length 3m f CPU A series Extension base and GOT GT15 C50NB Cable length 5m GT15 AC06B Cable length 0 6m GT15 AC12B Cable length 1 2m For connecting QnA ACPU Motion controller GT15 AC30B Cable length 3m CPU A series Extension base and A7GT CNB GT15 AC50B Cable length 5m GT15 A370C12B S1 Cable length 1 2m GT15 A370C25B S1 Cable length 2 5m For connecting Motion controller CPU A series Extension base and GOT GT15 A370C12B Cable length 1 2m GT15 A370C25B Cable length 2 5m For connecting Motion controller CPU A series Extension base and A7GT CNB Small size CPU long distance connection cable GT15 C100EXSS 1 Cable length 10 6m GT15 C200EXSS 1 Cable length 20 6m GT15 C300EXSS 1 Cable length 30 6m For long distance connection of QnAS AnSCPU motion controller CPU A series and GOT For connecting A7GT CNB and a combined product of the GT15 EXCNB and GT15 CLJBS for long distance connection GOT to GOT connect
44. 6C Cable length 20 m communication module and GOT GT09 C300R4 6C Cable length 30 m z O ll ei 2 2 Component List E Connection cables for OMRON PLCs Sold separately Product nie Model name Description name For connecting GOT to OMRON PLC serial communication module GT09 C30R20101 9P Cable length 3m oe ee RS 232 communication board serial communication board cable GT09 C30R20102 25S Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to OMRON connection cable GT09 C30R20103 25P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to OMRON rack type host link unit GT09 C30R40101 9P Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40101 9P Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to OMRON PLC serial communication module GT09 C200R40101 9P Cable length 20m serial communication board GT09 C300R40101 9P Cable length 30m GT09 C30R40102 9P Cable length 3m RS 422 GT09 C100R40102 9P Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to OMRON rack type host link unit cable GT09 C200R40102 9P communication board Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40102 9P Cable length 30m GT09 C30R40103 5T Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40103 5T Cable length 10m GT09 C200R40103 5T Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40103 5T Cable length 30m For connecting GOT to OMRON communication board CP1W CIF11 E Connection cables for KEYENCE PLCs Sold separately Product ee Model name Description name GT09 C30R21101 6P Cable length 3m For conn
45. CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 Before removing the unit unscrew the extension interface relay board fixing screws e Option unit e Bus connection unit GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS2 e MELSECNET H communication unit e CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit e CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 8 1 Communication Unit 8 3 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION es WIRING zZ O a e 8 2 Option Unit The option unit is used to relate the GOT extension interfaces to the system at the connection destination To connect the option unit make Communication Settings for communications with a controller For details of connection refer to the following manual GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals for GT Works3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2 GT Works2 8 2 1 Applicable option unit The following option units are applicable for GT16 Item Product name Model Description Video input unit GT16M V4 For video input signal 4 channels NTSC format PAL format compliant RGB input unit GT16M R2 For analog RGB input signal 2 channels Video RGB Video RGB input For video input signal 4 ch l unit Weir Inpd GT16M V4R1 SNe PEE Oe Sannes NTSC format PAL format compliant unit for analog RGB
46. GOT main unit coefficient H option coefficient H option coefficient F for 3 stages G GOT main unit coefficient H option coefficient H option coefficient H option coefficient Example A calculation example is shown below F dimension for 3 stages for installing a multimedia unit GT16M MMR in the first stage a CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit GT15 J71GP23 SxX in the second stage and a CF card unit GT15 CFCD in the third stage of the GT1695M X F for 3 stages 2 main unit coefficient of GT1695M X 35 5 option coefficient of GT16M MMR 35 5 GT15 J71GP23 SX 20 5 GT15 CFCD 89 5 The dimension after installing the above mentioned extension units is F 89 5mm App 10 8 External dimensions of the communication cable a External dimensions of the bus connection cable connector Cable model Cable length m ft External dimensions GT15 QCOIB 0 6 2 0 1 2 3 9 3 10 5 16 10 33 Fig 1 GT15 QCO1BS 15 49 20 66 25 82 30 98 35 115 Fig 1 GT15 CLJNB 1 2 3 9 3 10 5 16 Fig 2 GT15 ACLB 0 6 2 0 1 2 3 9 3 10 5 16 Fig 3 GT15 A370CLIB S1 1 2 3 9 2 5 8 2 Fig 4 GT15 A370CLB 1 2 3 9 2 5 8 2 Fig 5 GT15 A1SCLIB 0 7 2 3 1 2 3 9 3 10 5 16 Fig 6 GT15 A1SCLINB 0 45 1 5 0 7 2 3 3 10 5 16 Fig 7 GT
47. GT15 C O EXSS 1 or GT15 C O BS perform the grounding in the following steps 1 GOT terminal block The terminal block layout of a GOT differs depending on the model Before wiring check the terminal layout of the GOT to be used 2 Ground cables Up to two ground cables can be connected to the LG and FG terminals of the GOT respectively For three or more ground cables connect the third or later ground cables to the LG terminal 7 10 7 6 Grounding Extension Units 1 When using GT15 C EXSS 1 1 Not connected D00000 D o D O ius 2 i oT Sji z 2SQ cables to S FG terminals S Bo 28cm or less S 4 1 2 f Connect the LG and FG terminals of the terminal block on the GOT unit power and ground them with a cable Use the GT15 C BS s FG cable of 28cm or less Do not connect the GT15 EXCNB s FG ground cable Connect the GT15 C BS s FG cable on the GOT side to FG of the GOT unit power s terminal block 5 Connect the GT15 C LJ BS s FG cable on the PLC side to FG of the PLC s power supply module 6 Connect the LG and FG terminals of the terminal block on the PLC and ground them with a cable 2 When using GT15 C O BS For the both side GOTs connect the LG and FG terminals of the terminal block on the GOT unit power and ground them with a cable 7 6 2 Wiring FG cable
48. and Settings of the GT1695 No Name Description Lit in green Power is correctly supplied Lit in orange Screen saving 1 POWER LED Blinks in orange green Blown back light bulb Not lit Power is not supplied Ww 2 Display screen Displays the Utility and the user creation screen a O 3 Touch key For operating the touch switches in the Utility and the user creation screen 4 USB interface Device For connecting a personal computer Connector type Mini B zZ i 5 USB interface Host For connecting a USB mouse keyboard data transfer and storage Connector type TYPE A 6 RS 232 interface For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer a o Connector type D sub 9 pin 5 gt O For communicating with a controller or using the gateway function nO 7 Eth t interf ppg taem Connector type RJ 45 modular jack 8 RS 422 485 interface For communicating wilh a controller Connector type 14 pin female g 9 Power terminal Power input terminal LG terminal FG terminal 2 lt x 10 Extension interface1 For installing an extension unit I F 1 2 11 Extension interface2 For installing an extension unit I F 2 ii a 12 CF card interface For installing a CF card 2 Lit CF card accessed Pee a eee LED Not lit CF card not accessed Used for accepting or stopping the access to the CF card before removing the CF card from the GOT 14
49. attached with the A part of the cover firmly pushed into Compliant with IP2X at the USB interface when a USB cable or USB memory is connected Note that this does not guarantee all users operation environment In addition the GOT may not be available for use in the environment where oil or chemicals are splashed over for a long period or where oil mist is filled For using multiple extension units a barcode reader or an RFID controller the total current for the extension units barcode reader or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply For the current for the extension units bar code reader or RFID controller and the current that the GOT can supply refer to the following manual GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 2 8 Multi channel Function To use a stylus pen the following specifications must be met e Material polyacetal resin e Tip radius 0 8mm or more If the operating ambient temperature is other than 25 C the error may become large When using a stylus pen it will be 100 000 times or more operating force 0 98N max Since the touch panel is a consumable product structurally it may not be used even fewer than above depending on the using method and usage environment A USB memory and a CF card that store more than 2GB are available for the GT16 with the following versions of OSs installed BootOS version
50. avoid this symptom as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect The GOT screen saving backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the display screen and increases the backlight life ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached with the A part of the cover firmly pushed into Compliant with IP2X at the USB interface when a USB cable or USB memory is connected Note that this does not guarantee all users operation environment In addition the GOT may not be available for use in the environment where oil or chemicals are splashed over for a long period or where oil mist is filled For using multiple extension units a barcode reader or an RFID controller the total current for the extension units barcode reader or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply For the current for the extension units bar code reader or RFID controller and the current that the GOT can supply refer to the following manual lt 3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 2 8 Multi channel Function The function version A is not compatible with 10BASE T For how to check the function version refer
51. battery from the GOT and disconnect the connector A Connect the new battery to the connector 5 After installing the battery to the GOT put back the cable in place and store the battery in the reverse procedure of step 2 6 Turn the GOT power supply on 7 Check if the battery condition is normal within the utility Refer to the following for the details of battery status display lt gt Basic Utility 2 1 1 Time setting 1 Precautions after battery replacement Make sure to turn on the GOT power supply once upon completion of battery replacement Failure to do so may decrease the battery life 2 When the 2 slot type extension unit is connected to GT1665 GT1662 Before installing or replacing the battery disconnect the unit When connecting or disconnecting the unit be sure to power off the GOT and PLC 8 14 8 3 Option E Protective sheet 7 Ifthe old protective sheet is attached remove the sheet from the lower right of the GOT and clean the GOT surface Peel off the sheet slowly 2 Peel the release paper off the back of the new protective sheet With the protective film left on the sheet surface attach the sheet on the GOT so that the USB environmental protection cover hole is just on the USB environmental protection cover of the GOT For the protective sheet covered USB environmental protection cover type attach the sheet on the GOT so that the LED hole is just on the POWER LED section of the GOT
52. be installed in the third step 8 2 Option Unit RS 422 side connector 25 pins 8 3 Option Options are used for the expansion of GOT functions parts replacement or maintenance 8 3 1 Applicable option The following options are applicable for GT16 Product name CF card Mode GT05 MEM 16MC Description Flash ROM 16MB GT05 MEM 32MC Flash ROM 32MB GT05 MEM 64MC Flash ROM 64MB GT05 MEM 128MC Flash ROM 128MB GT05 MEM 256MC Flash ROM 256MB GT05 MEM 512MC Flash ROM 512MB GT05 MEM 1GC Flash ROM 1GB GT05 MEM 2GC Flash ROM 2GB GT05 MEM 4GC 6 Flash ROM 4GB GT05 MEM 8GC 6 Flash ROM 8GB GT05 MEM 16GC 6 Flash ROM 16GB Commercially available CF card 8 Reference 8 3 2 MCF card Memory card adaptor GT05 MEM ADPC Converts the CF card into a memory card 8 3 2 Memory card adaptor 8 3 2 MOpti Option function board GT16 MESB For MES interface function board are function board GT15 BAT Battery for backup of clock data maintenance time notification data system status log For 15 12 1 10 4 8 4 Battery 8 3 2 mBattery GT11 50BAT Battery for backup of clock data maintenance time notification data system status log For 5 7 Protective sheet GT16 90PSCB GT16 90PSGB GT16 90PSCW 4 GT16 90PSGW 4 GT16 90PSCB 012 7 ear 5 sheets ntiglare 5 sheets Prot
53. built in batteries manufactured before the enforcement date of the new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC 9 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement 9 5 Q z lt O 2z zo ii G Ew Za 2 2 TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES 9 5 Backlight Shutoff Detection and Replacement The backlight is built into GOT for the liquid crystal display When GOT detects backlight shutoff the POWER LED blinks green orange alternately The LED backlight requires the LCD replacement Contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd The cold cathode tube backlight lowers its intensity with the duration of use When backlight shutoff is detected or the display becomes unclear replace the backlight When replace the backlight refer to 9 6 Backlight Replacement 1 Life of backlight The usable duration of backlight can be extended by setting to Screen saving backlight off in the utility of GOT GOT set up Refer to the following for details Basic Utility 2 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 2 Replacement time of backlight The backlight replacement time can be set by the utility of GOT Maintenance timing setting with reference to the life of backlight Refer to the following for details Basic Utility 2 4 1 Maintenance time setting Moreover when system alarm is used the message that notifies of the backlight replacement time can be displayed on the GOT screen Sys
54. bus connection cable 2 6 QnA ACPU Motion controller A series bus Connection Cable 2 cceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeees 2 6 R RFID Controllet ic ccecte ccd tnevesti dere ite accents 2 14 Rough pre operation procedure 0 0 1 3 RS 282 Cable sea 2 7 2 8 RS 422 Cable siisssccicccisessccedielsasscccedagscevevassedetce 2 7 2 9 RS 422 connector conversion cable 0 2 12 RS 422 conversion unit eeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeees 2 13 RS 485 connector terminal block conversion modules with Cable cccccceeesseeeeeeeeeees 2 13 8 22 S Screen data transfer Cable cccceeeteeeee 2 18 Small size CPU extension cable 06 2 6 Small size CPU long distance connection cable 2 6 Slander iie 2 15 8 20 System configuration eee ee eeen 2 1 T Third party PLC connection cable 2 3 2 8 Index 1 INDEX Transportation Precautions ceeeee App 15 U USB environmental protection cover 2 17 8 19 Index 2 REVISIONS For the software functions refer to the product specific screen design manual Print Date May 2010 Manual Number SH NA 080928ENG A The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Revision First edition Jun 2010 SH NA 080928ENG B Added GT1675 VN GT1672 VN GT1662 VN Oct 2010 SH NA 080928ENG C Compatible with GT Des
55. cause an electric shock fire malfunction or product damage or deterioration When mounting the GOT to the control panel tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range 0 36 to 0 48 Nem with a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT When loading the communication unit to the GOT fit it to the connection interface of the GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range 0 36 to 0 48 Nem with a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop failure or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit When mounting the option function board onto the GOT connect it to the corresponding connector securely and tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range 0 25 to 0 35 Nem with a Phillips head screwdriver No 1 Undertightening can cause malfunction due to poor contact Overtightening can cause malfunction due to screw or unit damage When inserting a CF card into the GOT push it into the CF card interface of GOT until the CF card eject button will pop out If not properly inserted a bad connection may cause a malfunction When inserting removing a CF card into from the GOT turn the CF card access switch off in advance Failure to d
56. communicating wih a controller Connector type 14 pin female 9 Power terminal Power input terminal LG terminal FG terminal 10 Extension interface1 For installing an extension unit I F 1 11 Extension interface2 For installing an extension unit I F 2 12 CF card interface For installing a CF card Lit CF card accessed 13 CF card LED aoe Not lit CF card not accessed Used for accepting or stopping the access to the CF card before removing the CF card from the GOT 14 CF card access switch ON CF card being accessed CF card removal prohibited OFF CF card not accessed CF card removal possible 15 Video RGB interface 1 per mounting the video input unit RGB input unit video RGB input unit RGB output unit or multimedia unit Terminati ist tting di itch 16 Simina Mere SEROR SNIE For switching on and off of the terminating resistor for the RS 422 485 communication port inside the cover 17 Optional function board interface For installing the optional function board 18 Reset switch Hardware opel switch l N Inoperative in the bus connection or with the bus connection unit installed 19 Hole for unit installation fitting Hole for inserting the unit installation fitting 20 Battery cover Houses the battery 21 Installation switch Used for OS installations at the GOT startup 4 There is no interface in GT1675 VN and GT1672 VN aiy Ea Connector used for the RS 232 interface The specification of t
57. communicating with a controller using the gateway function or connecting a personal A computer Project data read write FA transparent function MES interface function Built in USB Full Speed 12Mbps Host 1ch interface Connector shape TYPE A Application For connecting a USB mouse keyboard USB memory data i transfer data storage 5 When formatting a USB memory to FAT16 Up to 2GB z USB When formatting a USB memory to FAT32 Up to 32GB e USB Full Speed 12Mbps Device 1ch he Connector shape Mini B Application For connecting a personal computer Project data read write OS 5 installation FA transparent function Compact flash slot 1ch a Connector shape TYPE Application Data transfer data storage GOT startup a car When formatting a CF card to FAT16 Up to 2GB z When formatting a CF card to FAT32 Up to 32GB Aa ERO Option function board For option function board mounting 1ch zia bE oe Extension unit S For communication unit option unit mounting 1ch lt u Buzzer output Single tone tone length adjustable F Outside the enclosure IP67 4 Protective structure Inside the enclosure IP2X External dimensions 167 6 57 W X 135 5 31 H X 60 2 36 D mm inch 5 w Panel cutting dimensions 153 5 31 W X 121 4 76 H mm inch p fo ILO Weight mounting fixtures are not included 1 0kg 2 2lb a a uwu gt a Compatible software package GT Designer3 Version1 28E or later zZ O KB 5 z 2 zZ oO Zz ac
58. data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series GT Designer2 Classic Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series GT Designer2 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series iQ Works Abbreviation of iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works MELSOFT Navigator Generic term for integrated development environment software included in the SWLIDNC IQWK iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works Abbreviation of SWLIDNC GXW2 E and SWODNC GXW2 EA type programmable controller GX Works2 f engineering software GX Simulator2 Abbreviation of GX Works2 with the simulation function GX Simulator Abbreviation of SWLID5C LLT E EV type ladder logic test tool function software packages SW5D5C LLT EV or later versions GX Developer GX LogViewer Abbreviation of SWLJD5C GPPW E EV SW D5F GPPW E type software package Abbreviation of SWLIDNN VIEWER E type software package PX Developer Abbreviation of SWLJD5C FBDQ E type FBD software package for process control MT Works2 Abbreviation of motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2 SWODNC MTW2 E MT Developer Abbreviation of SWLIRNC GSV type integrated start up support software for motion controller Q series MR Configurator2 Abbreviation of SWLIDNC MRC2 E type Servo Con
59. in fash ey TIMbyles for storing project data and OS Memory 3 is amberat it te Numberot write 100 000 times times Built in clock precision 3 47 to 8 38sec day Operating ambient temperature of 25 C 7 Battery GT15 BAT lithium battery Backup target Clock data maintenance time notification data system status log SRAM user area 500KB Life Approx 5 years Operating ambient temperature of 25 C Continued to next page 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 11 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 7 z Qo He prd 9 Ww Ww o oO PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION Built in interface Item RS 232 5 Specifications GT1665M STBA GT1665M VTBA GT1662 VNBA GT1665M STBD GT1665M VTBD GT1662 VNBD RS 232 1ch Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800 bps Connector shape D sub 9 pin Male Application For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer Project data read write OS installation FA transparent function RS 422 485 5 Ethernet RS 422 485 1ch Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800 bps Connector shape 14 pin female Application For communicating with a controller Data transfer method 100BASE TX 10BASE T 1ch Connector shape RJ 45 modular jack Application For communicating with a controller using the gateway function
60. in the Utility and the user creation screen 4 USB interface Device For connecting a personal computer Connector type Mini B 3 5 USB interface Host For connecting a USB mouse keyboard data transfer and storage 2 Connector type TYPE A a 5 6 RS 232 interface For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer Connector type D sub 9 pin fi nz For communicating with a controller or using the gateway function gt 90 T Eth t interf nO up ene Connector type RJ 45 modular jack 8 RS 422 485 interface For communicating a a controller Connector type 14 pin female no 9 Power terminal Power input terminal LG terminal FG terminal 6 10 Extension interface1 For installing an extension unit I F 1 3 ma 11 Extension interface2 For installing an extension unit I F 2 G a 12 CF card interface For installing a CF card n Lit CF card accessed 13 CF card LED PA SASS Not lit CF card not accessed Used for stopping the access to the CF card before removing the CF card from the GOT 14 CF card access switch ON CF card being accessed CF card removal prohibited OFF CF card not accessed CF card removal possible For mounting the video input unit RGB input unit video RGB input unit RGB 15 Video RGB interface 1 i output unit or multimedia unit z lt y no lt 0 zz 22 Par awn Terminati ist tti itch 16 Sain a E For switching on and off
61. installation Z9 2 Q o D a Unit mm inch 6 3 Mounting Position 6 5 2 Prohibited area for installation The control panel side installation unit cannot be installed within 25mm 0 98inch from the GOT When the CF card extension unit is used with the other extension units the control panel side installation unit cannot be installed in some areas because the cables of the other extension units get in the way of the control panel side installation unit The following shows prohibited areas for the installation a For GT1695 The control panel side installation unit cannot be installed within 25mm 0 98inch from the GOT Prohibited areas for the installation with the other extension units do not exist b For GT1685 The control panel side installation unit cannot be installed within 25mm 0 98inch from the GOT When the other extension units are used the control panel side installation unit cannot be installed in the areas shown in the following figure Hole for installing GOT View from the rear side 130 80 6 12 3 15 Prohibited area for installation with an extension unit Extension unit Model X Unit mm inch Bus connection unit GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 75ABUSL GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 QBUS2 GT15 75QBUSL GT15 QBUS S1 1 28 Serial communication unit Soe GT19RS493 a GT15 RS4 TE GT15 J71LP23 25 68 2
62. installed on the multimedia unit or delete 634 multimedia CF card Terminating x unnecessary files long time recording Reconfigure the GOT FTP client setting f Check the operating status and network line of the FTP server 640 An error occurred in a FTP client For the error details check the GOT special register GS989 FTP x rocess ae ere p communication error notification GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3 The license key has not been 641 Register the license number for the VNC server function on the GOT x registered Confirm your license Refer to explanations of SB0020 on the applicable network manual 800 Abnormal module status For the CC Link IE Field Network refer to the manual of MELSEC Q CC O Link IE Field Network master local module 801 Abnormal baton passing status Refer to explanations of SB0047 on the applicable network manual O Abnormal cyclic transmission 802 iois Refer to explanations of SB0049 on the applicable network manual O u 803 Transient error Refer to explanations of SBOOEE on the applicable network manual G The cable on the IN side is 804 disconnected or is not Refer to explanations of SB0067 on the applicable network manual O connected 10 3 Error Message and System Alarm 10 27 Error Channel No Error message Action code storage The cable on the OUT side is 805 disconnected
63. not guarantee protection in all environments This cover may not be appropriate for use in environments where it is exposed to oil and chemicals for a long time or environments with large amounts of oil mist 8 3 Option E USB environmental protection cover The USB environment cover protects the USB interface on the front face of GOT from dust water and oil The GOT is installed with the USB environment cover at factory shipment z Replace when damage and deterioration are caused 4 Note that this does not guarantee all users operation environment Fe In addition the GOT may not be available for use in the environment where oil or chemicals are splashed over for a long period or 5 where oil mist is filled Get up the hinge of the USB environmental protection cover Zz O ORS amp j E ie LS Do 2 Put the provided fixing screw through the hinge hole and then fit the screw in 2 the cover installation hole on the GOT 2 S We O W Fixing screw es S 3 Tighten the screw with a torque of 0 36 to 0 48Nem T Fitting the hinge projections in the GOT guiding holes makes the cover 28 installation work easier eam aw a z 4 When the USB interface is not used fix the cover by pushing the A mark on E m the latch firmly ows ILO of Sox meda Z O 5 When the USB interface is used unfix the latch to open the cover and then z connect the USB cable z Z
64. number of terminals for solderless or preparatory soldered terminals Cable distinction numbers for one manufacturer s products Two digit sequence number 01 02 When cable distinction is needed for one manufacture s products CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Example Wirings are different for each PLC type Connecting targets are different such as servo inverter temperature controller 01 For OMRON PLC 02 For YASKAWA PLC 03 For YOKOGAWA PLC 04 For HITACHI IEC PLC 05 For TOSHIBA PLC 06 For SHARP PLC 07 For ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 08 For SIEMENS PLC 09 For PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNXPLC Cable classification Length classification Indicated in 10cm unit Example 3m 30 30m 300 Third party PLC connection cable Commonly used for GT16 GT15 and GT11 10 For FUJI PLC i 11 For KEYENCE PLC 12 For JTEKT PLC 13 For HITACHI PLC Application classification R2 For RS232 communication For GOT1000 side R4 For RS422 communication A 2 2 Component List 2 3 2 2 1 GOT Product Model name Specifications name 15 1024 x 768 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors GT1695M XTBA i video RGB multimedia compliant 100 to 240VAC Memory size 15MB 15 1024 x 768 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors GT1695M XTBD i i video RGB multimedia compliant 24VDC Memory s
65. of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series separately available or contact your local distributor Product name Description USB mouse Commercially available USB mouse E USB keyboard Sold separately Model name 4 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the validated models refer to Technical News GOT A 0010 List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series separately available or contact your local distributor Product name Description USB keyboard Commercially available USB keyboard 1 E Bar code reader Sold separately Model name 4 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the validated models refer to Technical News GOT A 0010 List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series separately available or contact your local distributor Product name Description x Bar code reader Commercially available bar code reader 1 E RFID controller Sold separately Model name 4 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the validated models refer to Technical News GOT A 0010 List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series separately available or contact your local distributor Product name Description RFID controller Commercially available RFID controller 1 E Memory card adaptor Sold separately GT05 MEM ADPC E Option function board Sold separately
66. of the input voltage touching the terminal may lead to an electric shock zZ e When grounding GT1655 ground it to FG on the power terminal block Refer to the figure above The functional grounding FG should be for FG connection such as bus connection cable CF card extension unit connection cable or others 2 Wiring the power section of the GT1655 when using an extension unit Be sure to wire the power section before connecting a cable to the extension unit If connecting a cable to the extension unit before wiring the power section the terminal block of the power section will be blocked by the cable and the power section cannot be wired OPTION 7 2 Wiring to GOT Power Section 7 3 7 3 Grounding 7 3 1 Grounding the GOT E About grounding Perform the following three items for grounding e Independent grounding should be performed as possible for the GOT Perform grounding works grounding resistance 100 or less e When independent grounding cannot be performed for the GOT perform 2 Shared grounding shown below A D gt Other Other a iner GOT device device device O L A Si Grounding Grounding ZN D 1 Independent ground 2 Shared grounding 3 Common grounding swis Best condition Good condition Not allowed Use a cable of 2mm or more for grounding when performing 1 or 2 above Ground the cable at a point as close to the GOT as possible to make the ground cable s
67. or change the name of the file to be created There is no response to the initializing command because the modem is Modem is not connected i not connected correctly or the power is not turned on 338 correctly or the power is not X Confirm the modem connection turned on e Turn on the power of the modem f hice An error is returned from the modem because the initializing command is Failed to initialize the modem 339 O invalid x Check initialization command eee Confirm the initializing command of the modem Printer is faulty or the printer power supply has not been turned on 340 Printer error or power failure e Confirm the printer x e Turn on the power supply of the printer Printer is faulty or the printer power supply has not been turned on 341 Printer error e Confirm the printer x e Turn on the power supply of the printer Error occurred at the external I O interface module If an external power supply 24VDC is not supplied supply the External power is not supplied to P pply pE PEY 342 external power supply x external I O unit If an external power supply is supplied replace the external I O interface module 343 External I O unit installation The external I O interface module is not installed correctly x error Check if firmly installed Install the external I O interface module correctly Any value that cannot be converted to a BCD BIN value is being 345 BCD BIN conversion error displayed in
68. or is not Refer to explanations of SBO068 on the applicable network manual O connected Check if the switch settings have no error 850 CC Link switch setting error Check error codes stored in SWOO6A O Refer to explanations of SBOO6A on the applicable network manual Check if terminating resistors are connected PAN Check error codes for the PLC CPU Abnormal cyclic transmission 851 status Check the parameter for the PLC CPU on the master station O u Check the error status of the master station Refer to explanations of SB006E on the applicable network manual Check if the cable is unplugged or not 852 Abnormal host line status O Refer to explanations of SB0090 on the applicable network manual Check the transient error occurrence status for each station stored in 853 Transient error SW0094 to SW0097 O Refer to explanations of SB0094 i When an error occurs FFH is stored to the channel No 10 28 10 3 Error Message and System Alarm NOILOAdSNI SNILOOHSATENOL SASDIGNAddV ANY SONVNALNIVI OS ER ER 10 29 10 3 Error Message and System Alarm APPENDICES Appendix1 External Dimensions 1 GT1695 10 0 39 281 11 06 10 0 39 App 1 397 15 63 _ 320 12 60
69. power ON OFF the PLC CPU O Restored LJ Not restored Proceed to d d Power the GOT and PLC CPU ON OFF simultaneously O Restored O Not restored Proceed to e Action Take the action of 4 h e Connect the cable again O Restored O Not restored Proceed to f The cable connection may be faulty Securely connect the cable If an error occurs again proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation f Reinstall the project data O Restored O Not restored Proceed to g Data may have been destroyed by an action such as powering the GOT OFF during the installation of project data or OS g Reinstall the OS O Restored O Not restored Proceed to h Do not power the GOT OFF while transferring data If an error occurs again proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation h Take the action described in the Action column O Restored O Not restored Proceed to i The GOT may have malfunctioned temporarily due to noise Take the action with referring to GOT installation status check sheet i Replace the unit module O Restored O Not restored The hardware of the unit module may be faulty Install the unit module with which the GOT malfunctioned again to see if the unit module caused the malfunction After checking proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation O The GOT is not restored even by performing a to i Proceed to 5 Trou
70. sheet GT16 50PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets GT16 50PSCW 4 Clear Frame White 5 sheets Protection sheet for 5 7 3 GT16 50PSGW 4 Antiglare Frame White 5 sheets Clear covered USB GT16 90PSCB 012 7 environmental protection cover type 5 sheets Protective cover for oil gt GT05 90PCO For 15 GOT GT05 80PCO For 12 1 GOT 3 20 i GT05 70PCO For 10 4 GOT 8 3 2 pies cover for oil GT05 60PCO For 8 4 GOT GT16 50PCO For 5 7 GOT USB environmental protection cover 5 GT16 UCOV Environmental cover for USB interface on the GOT main unit front side For complying IP67 For 15 12 1 10 4 8 4 8 3 2 BUSB environmental GT16 50UCOV Environmental cover for USB interface on the GOT main unit front protection cover side For complying IP67 For 5 7 GT15 90STAND Stand for 15 GT15 80STAND Stand for 12 1 Stand 8 3 2 Stand GT15 70STAND Stand for 10 4 8 4 GT05 50STAND Stand for 5 7 GT15 70ATT 98 Attachment for 10 4 Replaceable to GT1675 GT15 70ATT 87 GT15 60ATT 97 GT15 60ATT 96 Attachment Attachment for 8 4 Replaceable to GT1665 8 3 2 BAttachment GT15 60ATT 87 GT15 60ATT 77 GT15 50ATT 95W Attachment for 5 7 Replaceable to GT1655 GT15 50ATT 85 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 The flash PC card of the GOT A900 series In the GT16 the flash PC card for GOT A900 series cannot be used Use the CF card which is described in
71. step 1 to 3 When not installing an extension unit on the unit that has been installed in order to avoid receiving electrostatic stick accessory stickers to cover the top of mounting screws Keep the connector cover fixed Keep the sticker stuck as it is Accessory stickers Connector cover Sticker 8 2 8 1 Communication Unit 1 2 3 Installation position for a communication unit that occupies two extend interfaces Install a communication unit that occupies two extend interfaces such as the following directly to the GOT main unit It cannot be installed on the back stage of another communication unit If a video RGB unit or multimedia unit has been installed install the communication unit on the back stage of that video RGB unit or multimedia unit e Bus connection unit GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 75ABUS2L only e MELSECNET H communication unit e CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit e CC Link IE Field Network communication unit e CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 Installing the GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L These cannot be installed on the back stage of a video RGB unit or multimedia unit For bus connection use the GT15 QBUS GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS or GT15 ABUS2 Removing a video RGB unit multimedia unit bus connection unit GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS2 MELSECNET H communication unit CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit
72. such as PLC and the O Connected urren tat power equipment such as servo O Not status j amplifier are connected as shown connected by a j Panel grounding Connection cable Fig A Terminal block J Panel grounding Perform independent grounding at two places as shown in Fig A Measure for A gt Grounding for Grounding for Independent grounding can reduce the FG power system power system O Effective bl the influence of noise cables anne i If independent grounding is not O Ineffective connected allowed be sure to perform shared Gcineceorncaits grounding as shown in Fig B Fig B Panel grounding Y Panel grounding 6 Grounding status of the panel on which the GOT is installed Connection Ground cable led from the A single ground cable is led from the Current panel having the control panel having the control equipment O Led status Geal such as PLC to the panel having the C Not led GOT Connection cable Fig A Ground cable Connecting the ground cable to the PE na Tee panel having the GOT as shown in possible gt Fig A to reduce the potential difference may prevent the O Effective malfunction O Ineffective When wiring as shown in Fig A is difficult perform wiring as shown in Fig B Fig Ground cable B Ground to of the panel Measure for L the ground cable led Fig C Gicind cable Ferrite core Attaching the ferri
73. to the following cs Appendix2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards To use a Stylus pen the following specifications must be met Material polyacetal resin Tip radius 0 8mm or more If the operating ambient temperature is other than 25 C the error may become large When using a stylus pen it will be 100 000 times or more operating force 0 98N max Since the touch panel is a consumable product structurally it may not be used even fewer than above depending on the using method and usage environment A USB memory and a CF card that store more than 2GB are available for the GT16 with the following versions of OSs installed BootOS version 05 09 00AF or later Standard monitor OS version 05 09 00 or later With OSs earlier than the above versions the GOT cannot correctly recognize the USB memory and the CF card that store more than 2GB If the above versions of OSs are not installed install the OSs on the GOT by using GT Designer3 with version 1 17T or later GT Designer2 versionL is not compatible with a USB memory and a CF card that store more than 2GB For function version G or earlier refer to the following Display angle of the display section Left Right 80 degrees Top 60 degrees Bottom 80 degrees Backlight Cold cathode fluorescent tube replaceable Backlight life Approx 50 000 h or more 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 7 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM N z Qo He prd 9 s O Ww o
74. unit installation status and the PLC CPU status e This error may occur when the load of the PLC CPU becomes heavier 450 Path has changed or timeout when accessing other stations In such a case transfer the data of the O occurred in redundant system other stations to the host station PLC CPU and monitor them at the host Perform one of the following operations if the PLC scanning time is long COM instruction Extension of END processing Setting of the number of processing times for general data Data update batch processing Q redundant system settings ee Change the Q redundant setting in accordance with the actual Q 451 and current config do not O redundant CPU system match TO Reset the power of the GOT 460 Communication unit error O e Replace the unit Channel CH No 1 to 4 to communicate with a controller is not set on After setting the Communication Settings on the GT Designer3 or GT P Communication channel not set i i 1 480 H Designer2 download it to the GOT Set channel number on Utility POPP O Change the channel assignment in the Communication Setting on the utility The interface where the channel CH No 1 to 4 is set does not have a Se communication unit installed Communication unit not at e Install a communication unit to the interface where the channel CH 1 481 mounted to the slot of active No 1 to 4 is set O channel Change assignment of the channel CH No 1 to 4 i
75. zZ O ll Q O 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 15 3 16 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Bright dots always lit and dark dots unlit may appear on a liquid crystal display panel due to its characteristics It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect The GOT screen saving backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the display screen and increases the backlight life ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached with the A part of the cover firmly pushed into Compliant with IP2X at the USB interface when a USB cable or USB memory is connected Note that this does not guarantee all users operation environment In addition the GOT may not be available for use in the environment where oil or chemicals are splashed over for a long period or where oil mist is filled For using multiple extension units a barcode reader or an RFID controller the total current for the extension units barcode reader or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply For the current for the extension units bar code reader or RFID controller and the current that the GOT can supply refer to the following ma
76. 0 15 10 34 Error contents display wcfecsscicc facts og chelates pn tediti EEA T 10 15 10 3 2 List of error message System alarm 2 cece ee ceeeee eee ceee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeauaeeeseeeeeeneeeeeenenaees 10 17 APPENDICES Appendix1 External Dimensions ccccceccesccccce iadi a aaa aaa aa aa a diaa App 1 Appendix2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards 2 eccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeteeteeenesnneeaeees App 14 Appendix3 Transportation Precautions c ccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeccneaeeeeeeeeeeeseesecacaaeaeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesenniaaeess App 15 Appendix 3 1 Relevant models esaii niaaa aaa aaa aa aaa aa eaaa a a App 15 Appendix 3 2 Transportation guidelines cececeeeececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceaeaaeceeeeeeeeeeeeseseessencneaeeeeeees App 15 Appendix4 How to Choose DIive ccseccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeceaeaeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseteccccccaeaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeetennnneeees App 16 INDEX REVISIONS WARRANTY A 12 ABOUT MANUALS The following table lists the manual relevant to GT Designer2 product Refer to each manual for any purpose Manual Number Model code Manual Name Packing SH 080602ENG GT SoftGOT1000 Version2 Operating Manual Stored in CD ROM 1D7M48 SH 080529ENG GT Designer2 Version2 Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual For GOT1000 Series Stored in CD ROM 1D7M24 GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual For GOT1000 Series 1 3 GT De
77. 0 20PSGW For GT10 Protective cover for oil GT05 90PCO GT05 80PCO GT05 70PCO GT05 60PCO GT05 50PCO GT16 50PCO GT10 40PCO GT10 30PCO GT10 20PCO USB environmental protection cover GT16 UCOV GT16 50UCOV GT15 UCOV GT14 50UCOV GT11 50UCOV Stand GT15 90STAND GT15 80STAND GT15 70STAND A9GT 50STAND GT05 50STAND GT15 70ATT 98 GT15 70ATT 87 GT15 60ATT 97 GT15 60ATT 96 Attachment GT15 60ATT 87 GT15 60ATT 77 GT15 50ATT 95W GT15 50ATT 85 GT16 90XLTT GT16 80SLTT GT16 70SLTT GT16 70VLTT GT16 70VLTTA GT16 70VLTN Backlight GT16 60SLTT GT16 60VLTT GT16 60VLTN GT15 90XLTT GT15 80SLTT GT15 70SLTT GT15 70VLTT GT15 70VLTN GT15 60VLTT GT15 60VLTN Multi color display board GT15 XHNB GT15 VHNB Connector conversion box GT11H CNB 37S GT16H CNB 42S Emergency stop sw guard cover GT11H 50ESCOV GT16H 60ESCOV Memory loader GT10 LDR Memory board GT10 50FMB Panel mounted USB port extension GT14 C10EXUSB 4S GT10 C10EXUSB 5S E Software Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT Works3 Abbreviation of the SWODNC GTWK3 E and SWLIDNC GTWK3 EA GT Designer3 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer3 for GOT1000 series GT Simulator3 Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT1000 GOT900 series GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000 GT Converter2 Abbreviation of
78. 00 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used 8 1 1 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2 GT Works2 Applicable communication unit The following communication units are applicable for GT16 Product name Model Description For last GOT GTISOBUS Number of IN side connectors 1 For QCPU Q mode motion controller CPU Q series connection standard model For intermediary and last GOT GT15 QBUS2 Number of IN and OUT side connectors 1 for each side For last GOT GTISABUS Number of IN side connectors 1 For A QnACPU motion controller CPU A series connection standard model For intermediary and last GOT GT15 ABUS2 Number of IN and OUT side connectors 1 for each side Bus connection unit For last GOT CTIS geet Number of IN side connectors 1 For QCPU Q mode motion controller CPU Q z series connection slim model For intermediary and last GOT GT15 75QBUS2L Number of IN and OUT side connectors 1 for each side For last GOT GTIS SABUSL Number of IN side connectors 1 For A QnACPU motion controller CPU A series f connection slim model For intermediary and last GOT GT15 75ABUS2L Number of IN and OUT side connectors 1 for each side GT15 RS2 9P For RS 232 interface connection connector type Serial communication unit GT15 RS4 9S For RS 422 interface connection connector type GT15 RS4 TE For RS 422 interface c
79. 01 25P Cable length 3 m For connecting GOT to JTEKT PLC GT09 C30R41201 6C Cable length 3 m RS 422 GT09 C100R41201 6C Cable length 10 m For connecting GOT to JTEKT PLC cable GT09 C200R41201 6C Cable length 20 m E Connection cables for SHI Product name RS 232 cable GT09 C300R41201 6C Model name GT09 C30R21401 4T Cable length 30 m NKO indicating controller Sold separately Cable length 3m Description 2 2 Component List For connecting GOT to SHINKO indicating controller FCR 100 FCD100 FCR 23A PC FIR series 2 9 OVERVIEW z Q He lt 5 9 irs zZ fo 8 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION E Connection cables for TOSHIBA PLCs Sold separately Product vale Model name Description name RS 232 GT09 C30R20501 9P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC cable GT09 C30R20502 15P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC GT09 C30R40501 15P Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40501 15P Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC GT09 C200R40501 15P Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40501 15P Cable length 30m GT09 C30R40502 6C Cable length 3m RS 422 GT09 C100R40502 6C Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC cable GT09 C200R40502 6C Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40502 6C Cable length 30m GT09 C30R40503 15P Cable length 3m GT0
80. 1 Abnormal Advanced recipe file incorrect contents Delete the advanced recipe file from the CF card or x USB memory Cannot generate advanced recipe file Confirm the following and execute recipe processing again Cannot generate Advanced So 582 recipe file Confirm whether the CF card or USB memory is installed X ipe file 4 Confirm whether the CF card access switch of the GOT is ON Confirm the available memory of the CF card or USB memory Unable to save device value to advanced recipe file Unable to save device value to 583 Confirm the write protection of the CF card or USB memory X Advanced recipe file i ee n Confirm whether the attribute of saving file is for reading only NNS An error has occurred during the advanced recipe file writing Do not pull 584 Advance recipe file save error f tole x out the CF card or USB memory while the Advanced Recipe is operating poe An error has occurred during the advanced recipe file reading Advanced recipe file upload a 585 Sitor Do not pull the CF card or USB memory out while the Advanced Recipe is x operating 586 Specified Advanced recipe The advanced recipe of non existing number is about to be executed x number does not exist Execute advanced recipe of existing number 10 25 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 2 e e x N WW a a 2 0 APPENDICES Error Channel No Error message Ac
81. 14LFDT1 SLE or equivalent product 2 zZ Q H Q O 4 1 Part Names and Settings of the GT1695 4 2 4 2 Part Names and Settings of the GT1685 al SoS SSS CSS 6S CoD a c gt C J SS SS a gt MH cor jil 17 16 15 4 3 4 2 Part Names and Settings of the GT1685 No Name Description Lit in green Power is correctly supplied Lit in orange Screen saving 1 POWER LED Blinks in orange green Blown back light bulb Not lit Power is not supplied ne z Ti 2 Display screen Displays the Utility and the user creation screen 2 3 Touch key For operating the touch switches in the Utility and the user creation screen 4 USB interface Device For connecting a personal computer Connector type Mini B 3 5 USB interface Host For connecting a USB mouse ke
82. 15 CL EXSS 1 10 6 34 8 20 6 67 6 30 6 100 Figs 8 amp 9 GT15 EXCNB 0 5 1 6 Fig 8 GT15 COBS 0 7 2 3 1 2 3 9 3 10 5 16 10 33 20 66 30 98 Fig 9 GT15 J2C10B 1 3 Fig 10 4 The GT15 CL EXSS cable has a grounding wire 1 m The GT15 CL BS cable has a grounding wire For the cable length of 10m or more 1m for the cable length less than 10m 0 5m Be sure to connect the wire to control panels 2 The GT15 CL EXSS 1 is the set product consisting of GT15 EXCNB GT15 CL BS Refer to Fig A Fig A lip m Se GT15 EXCNB Fig 8 GT15 CLBS Fig 9 Unit mm inch 34 5 i 60 32 1 36 145 95 20 _ 2 36 L 1 26 11 5 10 0 39 6 71 3 74 0 79 1 einen 50 0 45 en a la 276 osgo CM SA o b Rae f ise k EE E N N a ee JAILS H PGR oF S ety i Ferrite core approx 035 1 38 PLC side Ferrite core approx 35 1 38 GOT side x40 1 57 red holder tube x40 1 57 green holder tube 11 5 32 60 L 2 36 50 T 0 45 1 26 i 20 A ff 0 79 1 97 Cable approx 2 76 110 Cable approx 50 I 17 0 0 67 as 4 33 __ 8 00 31 1 97 f im iu 3 ee 0 2 E a 1 a oH Ferrit 32 1 26 Ferrite core approx 35 1 38 a Pais greer helder ube 3
83. 1655 V Battery 1 Installation fitting 4 GT16 General Description 1 OVERVIEW eI gt E About GOT ui GOT is installed on the panel surface of control panel or operating panel and connects to the PLC in the control panel GOT carries out switch operation lamp PLC display data display and message display etc z f For display screen two kinds of display screens user created screen and utility a 5 screen are available eae 2 Ww 1 User created Screen Re User screen is a screen drawn by GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 as The objects of Touch switch Lamp display Comment display and GOT Numeric display can be laid out arbitrarily to be displayed Moreover the multiple screens created by GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 o P ra can be overlapped and switched to be displayed O ke lt lt For details refer to the following a W L3 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 5 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 9 lt 2 Utility Screen on Utility screen is a screen prepared beforehand for GOT 39 Installing BootOS and standard OS in the GOT from GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 enables utility screen le displaying o The utility screen has menus as Brightness contrast adjustment screen and GOT memory check screen etc For details refer to the followin
84. 2 60 11 5 33 11 5 1 20 L 2 36 20 0 45 1 30 L 0 45 110 50 0 79 160 Cable approx 110 a 4 33 Cable approx 1 97 aT eR 6 30 _ PBO SN i 4 33 al 8 0 0 31 E 9 F f eek T ei Be CA Eg a Ferrite core approx 635 1 38 Motion controller Ferrite core approx 35 1 38 a x40 1 57 green holder tube side x40 1 57 green holder tube A7GT CNB side App 11 11 5 32 32 60 1 26 L 2 36 1000 _ FG cable 75 20 5 115 T1110 50 0 45 1 26 39 37 2 95 0 81 0 45 4 33 Cable approx 1 97 T lt M 8 0 0 31 3 ole X g Oj s Sif 5 zE x E i 500 g acd PLC side 19 69 GOT side side Ferrite core approx 35 1 38 Cable approx 9 0 0 35 x40 1 57 green holder tube 11 5 33 0 45 1 30 L 1000 32 11 5 i 39 37 1 26 0 45 A er cable 100 Cable approx J r 5 G94 m 8 0 00 31 Z Ao g2 Ss 160 gt 110 f ik Yz 6 30 4 33 ales j Cabis ae Ferrite core approx 35 1 38 X01 7 green bel peo 38 GOT side 9 0 0 35 x40 1 57 blue holder tube A0J2 PW side b External dimensions of RS 422 connection cable connector Cable model Cable length m ft External dimensions GT16 C02R4 9S 0 2 0 7 Fig 11 GT01 C30R4 25P 3 10 Fig 12 GT01 CL R4 25P 10 33 20 66 30 98 Fig 13 GT01 CLOIR4 8P 1
85. 2 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection 10 13 10 2 3 Specific example of troubleshooting Taking the following system as an example troubleshooting is shown when PLC CPU error occurred When QnASCPU and the extension base unit are used PLC main base unit GOT 1 GOT 2 Extension cable Bus connection Bus connection cable cable Y Check the error code step appearing on the PLC CPU Obtain the status of the error and the location where the error occurs Yy The SP UNIT DOWN message appears on PLC CPU Y Turn off the power of the GOT Turn off the power of the PLC A A Replace the faulty PLC CPU with a new one Turn off the power of the GOT Turn off the power of the PLC The error occurs further not on PLC CPU y Turn on the power of the PLC Turn on the power of the GOT Yy Disconnect the bus connection cable from the GOT 2 at IN side to further locate the error positions Yy Turn off the power of the GOT Turn off the power of the PLC y The error occurs further not on the GOT 2 bus connection unit A A Turn on the power of the PLC Turn on the power of the GOT Vv Disconnect the bus connection cable from the GOT 1 at OUT side to further locate the error positions k d Turn on the power of the PLC Turn on the power of the GOT AA The error will not occur The bus connection cable connecting the GOT 1 to the GOT 2 is judged faulty Replace the faulty bus
86. 299 Thir pi connected with the GOT irdiparty Deal with errors according to the Temperature controller OMRON error messages temperature controller only Error code of the GOT main unit 300 to 399 function GoT 400 to 499 Error code of the GOT eS communication function 10 3 2 List of error message system alarm Error code of the GOT main unit 500 to 699 function Network 800 to 999 Error code of network GS264 User s manual of the QCPU 1000 to 10000 Error code of CPU CPU LCPU and QnACPU connected Value of SD0 for QCPU LCPU QnACPU i with GOT Motion Error code of motion controller User s manual of the motion 10001 to 10999 controller Q173DCPU Q172DCPU controller connected to GOT Error code of CNC GS263 User s manual of the CNC C70 CNC C70 11000 to 11999 Q173NCCPU connected to GOT Robot Error code of robot controller User s manual of the robot 12000 to 12999 controller Q172DRCPU controller connected to GOT Servo User s manual of the servo 20016 to 20237 Error code of servo amplifier amplifier amplifier connected to GOT i For details of GOT special registers GS262 to 264 refer to the following manual KE GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals App 2 1 GOT internal devices GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 2 9 1 GOT internal devices 2 The assigned error code for FXCPU is 100 to 109 which displays the status of M8060 to M8069 Example When the e
87. 302 6T Cable length 30m For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA PC link module GT09 C30R40303 6T Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40303 6T Cable length 10m GT09 C200R40303 6T Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40303 6T Cable length 30m For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA temperature controller GREEN series GT09 C30R40304 6T Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40304 6T Cable length 10m GT09 C200R40304 6T Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40304 6T Cable length 30m For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA temperature controller UT2000 series E Connection cables for ALLEN BRADLEY PLCs Sold separately Product name RS 232 cable Model name GT09 C30R20701 9S Cable length 3m Description For connecting GOT to ALLEN BRADLEY PLC E Connection cables for SIEMENS PLCs Sold separately Product name GT09 C30R20801 9S Cable length 3m Description For connecting GOT to SIEMENS HMI Adapter E RS 422 connector conversion cable Sold separately Product name RS 422 connector conversion cable 2 12 2 2 Component List Model name GT16 C02R4 9S Description RS 422 485 connector lt gt cable RS 422 connector conversion RS 422 side connector 9 pins E RS 485 connector amp terminal block conversion modules with cable Sold separately Product name Model name Description FA LTBGTR4CBL05 Cable length 0 5m RS 485 connector terminal block c
88. 30M 1000MHz QP 47dBHV m 10m in measurement range 5 1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS w 2 He S Ww x a INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 5 1 2 Control panel The GOT is an open type device device installed to another device and must be installed in a conductive control panel It not only assure the safety but also has a large effect to shut down the noise generated from GOT on the control panel 1 Control panel 2 a b c d e The control panel must be conductive When fixing a top or bottom plate of the control panel with bolts do not coat the plate and bolt surfaces so that they will come into contact And connect the door and box using a thick grounding cable in order to ensure the low impedance under high frequency When using an inner plate to ensure electric conductivity with the control panel do not coat the fixing bolt area of the inner plate and control panel to ensure conductivity in the largest area as possible Ground the control panel using a thick grounding cable in order to ensure the low impedance under high frequency The diameter of cable holes in the control panel must be 10cm 3 94in In order to reduce the chance of radio waves leaking out ensure that the space between the control panel and its door is small as possible Paste the following EMI gasket directly on the painted
89. 4 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant Product e For GT1655 Functional grounding INPUT X Fs FG N SICAL 90mm or less Ferrite core ZCAT3035 1330 Be sure to ground the functional ground terminal and power FG terminal VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 5 4 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant Product 5 14 5 4 2 Processing connection cables Process the cable used with the GOT with the following method When processing the cable ferrite core cable clamp and shielding material are required The cable clamp used by Mitsubishi Electric for the EMC specification compatibility test is shown below TDK corporation brand ZCAT3035 1330 Ferrite Core e Mitsubishi Electric Model AD75CK cable clamp e Japan Zipper Tubing Co Ltd Zipper tube SHNJ type 1 BUS connection cable a For GT15 QC COB GT15 QC O BS e Peel the sheath with the length shown below at both ends of the cable and expose the shield braided wire for grounding For grounding with cable clamps refer to Section 5 4 3 GOT side PLC GOT side n E 360 or less 40 40 360 or less 14 17 1 57 1 57 14 17 Unit mm inch b For GT15 C OBS Cut the connection wire protruding from both ends of the cable to the lengths shown below Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the position as illus
90. 6 3 6 4 Control Panel Inside Temperature and Mounting Angle ccceeseeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaes 6 10 6 5 Installation Procedure ie s 225 c c2ceccep deep Ai E latin teas tees Stine eeiandeedaiense 6 10 7 WIRING CA Power Supply Winga cssssn j ceececats vecentds ce addcend ES 7 2 7 2 Wiring to GOT Power Section cee cccceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeceeeaeeeeceneeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeseeaaees 7 3 T3 Grund ensi E E E R den entues 7 4 CoA Grondnd tHe GOT srren ra O paecacuan venetian sh oe eden lease 7 4 7 3 2 Wiring related malfunction causes and the measures examples cceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeenee 7 6 7 4 Panel Inside Wiring Panel Outside Wiring cceeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeseeeaeeeeteeeaaeees 7 8 GAT Panel MSide WANING wia ccdeveicccccenveedszcentivanacadaveeedcenceevaadcangaveddacaner valde ceqaaygalececavsts cedeaves ecbesiel ce 7 8 FAZ Panel Outside Win Qisscevs coctdcccies sxsceddvawnsndocca ys aeececeus E datedive dosaens rece 7 8 7 5 Attaching Surge Suppressor for Control EQuipMent 0 ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeenaeees 7 9 7 6 Grounding Extension Units i2 icai acest sty cient Aaaa Raa ALANNA intel neritic bli eesiaete 7 10 7 6 1 Wiring FG cable of bus connection Cable cccccceeeeteeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeitieeeeeeeteeeeeeetieeeeeeee 7 10 7 6 2 Wiring FG cable of CF card extension unit connection Cable ceeeeee
91. 6 colors 24VDC Memory size 11MB GT1665M STBA 8 4 800 x 600 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors video RGB multimedia compliant 100 to 240VAC Memory size 15MB GT1665M STBD 8 4 800 x 600 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors video RGB multimedia compliant 24VDC Memory size 15MB GT1665M VTBA 8 4 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors video RGB multimedia compliant 100 to 240VAC Memory size 15MB GT1665M VTBD 8 4 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors video RGB multimedia compliant 24VDC Memory size 15MB GT1662 VNBA 8 4 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal 16 colors 100 to 240VAC Memory size 11MB GT1662 VNBD 8 4 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal 16 colors 24VDC Memory size 11MB GT1655 VTBD 2 2 Component List 5 7 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors 24VDC Memory size 15MB 2 2 2 Option E Communication unit Sold separately Product name Bus connection unit Model name Description GT15 QBUS For last GOT Number of IN side connectors 1 For QCPU Q Mode Motion controller CPU Q Series For intermediary and last GOT GT15 QBUS2 connection standard model Number of IN and O
92. 68 MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71BR13 CC Link Controler Network GT15 J71GP23 SX 16 0 63 communication unit CC Link Pie Notions GT15 J71GF13 T2 oF communication unit CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 Video input unit GT16M V4 68 2 68 RGB input unit GT16M R2 Video RGB input unit GT16M V4R1 68 2 68 RGB output unit GT16M ROUT Multimedia unit GT16M MMR 68 2 68 Printer unit GT15 PRN CF card extension unit GT15 CFEX CO8SET 56 2 20 External I O unit GT15 DIO GT15 DIOR Prohibited areas for installing the control panel side installation unit with the extension unit do not exist 6 6 6 3 Mounting Position c For GT1675 GT1672 The control panel side installation unit cannot be installed within 25mm 0 98inch from the GOT When the other extension units are used the control panel side installation unit cannot be installed in the areas shown in the following figure Hole for installing GOT View from the rear side 130 80 5 12 3 15 Prohibited area for installation with an extension unit Extension unit Bus connection unit Model GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 75ABUSL GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 X Unit mm inch P GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 QBUS2 GT15 75QBUSL GT15 QBUS 40157 Serial communication unit QS RSP S EMSRS 9S 4 GT15 RS4 TE GT15 J71LP23 25 77 3 03 MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71BR13 33 1 30 CC
93. 7 Turn the power of the PLC and GOT on again O Ww GOT again 2 Units are mounted on the GOT exceeding the maximum number of a Too many units mounted on 1 a 488 mountable units Check the number of units and remove unnecessary lt GOT Reduce units f O units Inactive channel No has been set in the project data Inactive channel has been e Check whether any unnecessary channel No has been set in the 4 489 selected at Communication project data O Settings e Check whether channel Nos set in the project data are set in the Communication Settings 490 Simultaneous mounting of the Two or more units which cannot be mounted on the GOT simultaneously 4 units are not allowed are mounted Check the mounted units and remove unnecessary units O Units are mounted on the GOT exceeding the maximum number of Too many units mounted on 1 491 mountable units Check the number of units and remove unnecessary GOT Reduce units O units 492 Unusable communication units Unit unusable for GOT is installed 4 are mounted Remove the unusable unit O 500 Warning Built in battery voltage The voltage of the GOT built in battery is decreased x is low Replace the GOT built in battery The dedicated GS is notifying that the backlight power on addition time has reached 80 or more of the set time 502 Warning Backlight needs The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times reset function X replacement soon after replacing the b
94. 9 GT15 DIOR 2 52 18 0 71 GT15 SOUT 44 1 73 0 0 30 1 18 Unit mm inch App 6 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES App 7 c GT1675 GT1672 R Model name A B C D bending radius of the cable GT15 QBUS 95 3 74 40 1 57 55 2 17 GT15 QBUS2 21 0 83 GT15 ABUS 73 5 2 89 18 5 0 73 36 1 42 GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75QBUSL 95 3 74 40 1 57 55 2 17 GT15 75QBUS2L 8 0 31 GT15 75ABUSL 73 5 2 89 18 5 0 73 36 1 42 GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 RS2 9P 2 g 72 5 2 85 17 5 0 69 GT15 RS4 9S 2 30 1 18 GT15 RS4 TE 2 33 5 1 32 0 0 21 0 83 GT15 J71LP23 25 4 55 4 4 GT15 J71BR13 87 5 3 44 2 17 32 5 1 28 30 1 18 GT15 J71GP23 SX 80 3 15 25 0 98 15 0 59 35 1 38 GT15 J71GF13 T2 66 2 60 11 0 43 26 1 02 GT15 J61BT13 47 1 85 0 0 28 1 10 GT16M V4 132 5 20 77 3 03 20 0 79 GT16M R2 77 3 03 22 0 87 32 1 26 21 0 83 BNC 132 5 20 BNC 77 3 03 BNC 20 0 79 GT16M V4R1 RGB 77 3 03 RGB 22 0 87 RGB 32 1 26 GT16M ROUT 77 3 03 22 0 87 32 1 26 GT16M MMR 132 5 20 77 3 03 35 1 38 20 0 79 GT15 PRN 52 2 05 0 0 21 0 83 18 0 71 GT15 CFCD 20 0 79 GT15 CFEX CO8SET 120 4 72 65 2 56 55 2 17 GT15 DIO 55 81 3 19 26 1 02 43 1 69 GT15 DIOR 2 17 21 0 83 GT15 SOUT 44 1 73 0 0 30 1 18
95. 9 C100R40503 15P Cable length 10m GT09 C200R40503 15P Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40503 15P Cable length 30m For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC E Connection cables for HITACHI IES PLCs Sold separately Product AE Model name Description name For connecting GOT to HITACHI IES PLC intelligent serial port RS 232 GT09 C30R20401 15P Cable length 3m module cable GT09 C30R20402 15P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to HITACHI IES PLC GT09 C30R40401 7T Cable length 3m RS 422 GT09 C100R40401 7T Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to HITACHI IES intelligent serial port module cable GT09 C200R40401 7T Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40401 7T Cable length 30m E Connection cables for HITACHI PLCs Sold separately Product Model name Description name RS 232 For connecting GOT to HITACHI communication module LQE560 GT09 C30R21301 9S Cable length 3m Cable LQE060 LQE160 GT09 C30R41301 9S Cable length 3m RS 422 GT09 C100R41301 9S Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to HITACHI PLC LPQ510 and communication Cable GT09 C200R41301 9S module LQE565 LQE165 2 10 Cable length 20m GT09 C300R41301 9S 2 2 Component List Cable length 30m E Connection cables for FUJI PLCs Sold separately Product a Model name Description name RS 232 For connecting GOT to FUJI RS 232C interface card NV1L RS2 Gang GT09 C30R21003 25P Cable length 3m RS 232C 485 interface cap
96. A INDUSTRIES CO LTD RFC H13 or equivalent product When attaching a ferrite core insert the wire into the hole of the ferrite core several times approximately three times When taking of measure 2 1 is difficult since the wiring cannot be done for example perform the wiring as shown in 2 2 Connection cable Connection Ground cable Ferrite core a G d cabl Ferrite core round cable Use a short Ground to and thick piy the panel wire as aad possible Ground to q the panel Measure example 2 1 Measure example 2 2 7 3 Grounding 7 7 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION OPTION 7 4 Panel Inside Wiring Panel Outside Wiring 7 4 1 Panel inside wiring In wiring the power line connected to the power or servo amplifier and the communication cable such as bus connection cable or network cable must not be mixed Mixing the power line and communication cable may cause malfunction due to noise When using an equipment that may occur surge noise such as molded case circuit breaker MCCB electromagnetic contactor MC relay RA solenoid valve or induction motor using a surge suppressor is effective For surge suppressor refer to the following 377 5 Attaching Surge Suppressor for Control Equipment Separated power lines and communication cables Mixed power lines and communication cables P
97. Abbreviation of GT1155 Q GT1150 Q GT11 Handy GOT cia GT1055 Q Abbreviation of GT1055 QSBD E GT1050 Q Abbreviation of GT1050 QBBD ries GT1045 Q Abbreviation of GT1045 QSBD GT1040 Q Abbreviation of GT1040 QBBD Abbreviation of GT1030 LBD GT1030 LBD2 GT1030 LBL GT1030 LBDW GT1030 LBDW2 GT1030 LBLW GT1030 LWD GT1030 LWD2 GT1030 LWL GT1030 LWDW GT1030 GT1030 LWDW2 GT1030 LWLW GT1030 HBD GT1030 HBD2 GT1030 HBL GT1030 HBDW GT1030 HBDW2 GT1030 HBLW GT1030 HWD GT1030 HWD2 GT1030 HWL GT1030 HWDW GT1030 HWDW2 GT1030 HWLW Abbreviation of GT1020 LBD GT1020 LBD2 GT1020 LBL GT1020 LBDW GT1020 LBDW2 GT1020 GT1020 LBLW GT1020 LWD GT1020 LWD2 GT1020 LWL GT1020 LWDW GT1020 LWDW2 GT1020 LWLW GT10 Abbreviation of GT1050 GT1040 GT1030 GT1020 Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT16 Handy GT1665HS V Abbreviation of GT1665HS VTBD Handy GOT GOT1000 Series COT GT11 GT1155HS8 Q Abbreviation of GT1155HS QSBD Handy GOT GT1150HS Q Abbreviation of GT1150HS QLBD GT SoftGOT 1000 Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT 1000 GOT900 Series Abbreviation of GOT A900 series GOT F900 series GOT800 Series Abbreviation of GOT 800 series Communication unit Abbreviations and generic terms Bus connection unit Description GT15 QBUS GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L Serial communication unit GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S GT15 RS4 TE
98. B unit not mounted X Check if the GOT used supports video RGB input 603 External I O unit error Check if the external I O unit is correctly installed x 604 Sound output unit error Check if the sound output unit is correctly installed x The error may be caused by a failure in the GOT 605 USB device I F error ly ee i X Contact your local Mitsubishi representative 606 Multimedia processing unit is Multimedia unit is installed incorrectly 4 not mounted Check that the multimedia unit is installed correctly O k The memory capacity for the MES interface function is insufficient 610 Insufficient memory capacity x Delete unnecessary files and reserve memory 10 26 10 3 Error Message and System Alarm Error Channel No Error message Action code storage a Zz Improper job files Confirm job The contents for job files are unmatched with the settings for job files s 611 i x O setting Check if there are mistakes in the settings on the setting screen Z ZE Insert a CF card or USB memory Uo Cannot access Logging Files zW 612 Turn on the CF card access switch x Zn Check the memory card sZ If the CF card or USB memory have unnecessary files delete the files Insert a CF card or USB memory 613 Error in writing logfile Turn on the CF card access switch x Check if the CF card or USB memory is writable Insert a CF card or USB memory 614 Error in reading logfile Turn on the CF car
99. BAT Battery for backup of clock data GT1695 GT1685 GT1675 maintenance time notification data and GT1672 GT1665 GT1662 Zz GT11 50BAT system status log GT1655 2 Pa E Battery specifications SB is The following describes the battery specifications for the GT16 D a Do Item Specifications Model name GT15 BAT GT11 50BAT 2 Type Magnesium manganese dioxide lithium primary battery 5 Initial voltage 3 0V Nominal current 1800mAh 550mAh 5 a Storage life Approx 5 years Operating ambient temperature of 25 C N Total power stoppage time L5 mBattery life Lithium content 0 00049kg 0 00015kg S lt Application For backup of clock data maintenance timing setting data and system status log 4 22 bE vty ee HINT 3 o For the battery directive in EU member states refer to 9 4mHandling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States a m w ow gt E Battery life Z25 W Life span of the battery set in the GOT is shown below GE Battery life Operating ambient temperature of Operating ambient temperature Data backup time after detection of 25 to 45 C Other than 25 to 45 C battery voltage low 6 4 years 14 days z lt In the following conditions the data backup time is 5 minutes after the power supply is turned off 2 The battery connector is disconnected The battery lead is disconnected Battery life and replacement time 6 1 Battery life reference Approx 4 years in actual use Ambient tempe
100. C30R40201 9P Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40201 9P Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to YASKAWA MEMOBUS module GT09 C200R40201 9P Cable length 20m RS 422 GT09 C300R40201 9P Cable length 30m cable GT09 C30R40202 14P Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40202 14P Cable length 10m GT09 C200R40202 14P Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40202 14P Cable length 30m For connecting GOT to YASKAWA PLC 2 2 Component List 2 11 OVERVIEW z Q He lt 5 9 ras z fo 8 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION E Connection cables for YOKOGAWA PLCs Sold separately Product name RS 232 cable Model name GT09 C30R20301 9P Cable length 3m Description For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA CPU port D Sub 9 pin conversion cable GT09 C30R20302 9P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA PC link module GT09 C30R20304 9S Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA converter ML2 0 GT09 C30R20305 9S Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA PLC RS 422 cable GT09 C30R40301 6T Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40301 6T Cable length 10m GT09 C200R40301 6T Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40301 6T Cable length 30m GT09 C30R40302 6T Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40302 6T Cable length 10m GT09 C200R40302 6T Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40
101. CF card access switch ON CF card being accessed CF card removal prohibited OFF CF card not accessed CF card removal possible For mounting the video input unit RGB input unit video RGB input unit RGB output unit or multimedia 15 Video RGB interface unit i z lt w no lt 0 zz 22 Par awn Terminating resistor setting dip switch 16 For switching on and off of the terminating resistor for the RS 422 485 communication port inside the cover 17 Optional function board interface For installing the optional function board Hardware reset switch 18 Reset switch Pd f Pr ny Inoperative in the bus connection or with the bus connection unit installed ow gt Zoe 19 Hole for unit installation fitting Hole for inserting the unit installation fitting E T x 20 Battery cover Houses the battery a fay 21 Human sensor Sensor that detects human movement 22 Installation switch Used for OS installations at the GOT startup zZ ly O KB Hinr O 5 Connector used for the RS 232 interface Z The specification of the connector used for the RS 232 interface of GT1695 is as follows Manufacturer DDK Ltd Model name 17LE 23090 27 D4CK or equivalent product Connector used for the RS 422 485 interface The specification of the connector used for the RS 422 485 interface of GT1695 is as follows ro Z Manufacturer Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co Ltd a Model name HDR EC
102. Ca PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 3 2 3 GT1675M S GT1675M V GT1675 VN GT1672 VN Specifications Item GT1675M STBA GT1675M VTBA GT1675 VNBA GT1672 VNBA GT1675M STBD GT1675M VTBD GT1675 VNBD GT1672 VNBD TFT color liquid tal display High intensity and wid Type aa iquid crystal display High intensity ane wide TFT color liquid crystal display angle view Screen size 10 4 Resolution 800 x 600 dots 640 x 480 dots Display size 211 8 31 W x 158 6 22 H mm inch Display character 16 dot standard font 50 characters x 37 lines 2byte character 12 dot standard font 66 16 dot standard font 40 characters x 30 lines 2byte character 12 dot standard font 53 characters x 40 lines 2byte character Display characters x 50 lines section 2byte character Display color 65536 colors 4096 colors 16 colors Left Right 80 d Left Right 80 d Sg bei ae ne Left Right 80 degrees Top 80 degrees Bottom 60 Display angle Top 80 degrees Bottom Top 80 degrees 13 10 degrees a 60 degrees Bottom 60 degrees Intensity of LCD only 400 cd m 500 cd m2 4 200 cd m Intensity adjustment 8 level adjustment 4 level adjustment E Approx 52 000 h Operating ambient temperature Approx 52 000 h Operating ambient temperature H 25 C 13 25 C LED irreplaceable 13 backl
103. Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 2 8 Multi channel Function To use a stylus pen the following specifications must be met Material polyacetal resin Tip radius 0 8mm or more If the operating ambient temperature is other than 25 C the error may become large When using a stylus pen it will be 100 000 times or more operating force 0 98N max Since the touch panel is a consumable product structurally it may not be used even fewer than above depending on the using method and usage environment A USB memory and a CF card that store more than 2GB are available for the GT16 with the following versions of OSs installed BootOS version 05 09 00AF or later Standard monitor OS version 05 09 00 or later With OSs earlier than the above versions the GOT cannot correctly recognize the USB memory and the CF card that store more than 2GB If the above versions of OSs are not installed install the OSs on the GOT by using GT Designer3 with version 1 17T or later GT Designer2 versionL is not compatible with a USB memory and a CF card that store more than 2GB For function version G or earlier refer to the following Display angle of the display section Left Right 80 degrees Top 80 degrees Bottom 60 degrees LCD intensity of the display section 600 cd m2 Backlight Cold cathode fluorescent tube replaceable Backlight life Approx 50 000 h or more For functi
104. English 101 keyboard or special keyboards For using upper compatible models of the Japanese 106 keyboard English 101 keyboard Japanese 109 keyboard English 104 keyboard keys that do not exist in the Japanese 106 keyboard English 101 keyboard cannot be used In addition a special keyboard such as with the hub function cannot be used with some models Ly Ta For installing multiple USB peripheral devices To install multiple peripheral devices install the USB hub to the GOT and then install the USB peripheral devices to the USB interface of the USB hub 8 24 8 5 Other Equipments Connected to the Main Unit 9 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Q z lt E 2z zo i G Ew Za 2 2 N WARNING Connect the battery correctly Do not discharge disassemble heat short solder or throw the battery into the fire These may cause the buttery to burst or fire Do not touch the terminals while the power is on Doing so can cause an electric shock Before starting cleaning or retightening the terminal screws always switch off the external power supplies used in the system in all phases Cleaning or retightening the terminal screws while the power is on may cause an electric shock Make sure to shut off all phases of the GOT power externally When the GOT is connected by the bus connection also externally shut off all phases of the PLC CPU power and remove the GOT from the control panel Then replace the cold cathode tube ba
105. External dimensions GT01 C30R2 6P 3 10 Fig 18 GT01 C30R2 9S 3 10 Fig 19 GT01 C30R2 25P 3 10 Fig 20 GT10 C30R2 6P 3 10 Fig 21 Unit mm inch 16 50 3000 40 13 16 50 3000 50 16 0 63 rary 118 11 1 57 0 51 0 63 pia 118 11 1 97 0 63 aria ete 6 0 24 on gt 2 aj 2 ae al B33 oo o z 20 0 79 A P7 0 28 281 70 16 50 3000 0 63 0 97 118 11 3000 ve 40 bd 118 11 200 1 57 Bt Ee 06 0 24 Approx 30 1 18 7 87 E 013 ayl t jr 0 51 amos om 47 1 85 4 18 K 0 16 50 O71 A 8 35 L 1 97 X i ost tasi 8 1 0 32 ae ale S3 E eg sie T iat 6 lt Bat So li il fe oy mE 29 App 13 1 89 d External dimensions of RS 485 terminal block conversion unit Cable length m ft 0 5 1 6 1 3 2 6 6 Cable model External dimensions FA LTBGTR4CBLTI Unit mm inch a F Appendix2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards E Rating plate The GOT hardware version function version Boot OS version and the standards conformed by a GOT can be confirmed at the rating plate on the GOT rear
106. F card CF card ie m The first CF card Project data qm E The second CF card Alarm history operation log GOT CF card unit E Example of how to use CF card extension unit The CF card extension unit can be used in the same way as the above Example of how to use CF card unit For using the CF card extension unit there is no need to open the control panel s door when a CF card is inserted or ejected Inside the i Outside the Project data is saved to the first CF card GOT 4 CF card extension unit mn GOT oe Alarm histories and operation logs are saved to the second CF card CF card extension unit App 16 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES eel INDEX B Backlight saorsan n 2 17 9 7 Backlight replacement 0 cccceeeeeeteeeeeenaes 9 7 Backlight shutoff detection and replacement 9 6 Bar Code reader cccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 14 Battery ccccecceeeeeeeeceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenee 2 15 8 14 Battery voltage low detection and battery replacement ceeeeeeecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaeees 9 4 Buffer circuit Cable ceseceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 7 Bus connection Unit cceeeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 5 Bus connector conversion bDOX 0 c0ceceeeees 2 13 Bus extension connector bOX 0 ceeeeeeeees
107. Link IE Controller Network er ee GT15 J71GP23 SX 25 0 98 communication unit CC Link IE Field Network et ee GT15 J71GF13 T2 1 0 04 communication unit CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 1 Video input unit 2 GT16M V4 77 3 03 RGB input unit 2 GT16M R2 1 Video RGB input unit 2 GT16M V4R1 77 3 03 RGB output unit 2 GT16M ROUT 1 Multimedia unit 2 GT16M MMR 77 3 03 Printer unit GT15 PRN 1 CF card extension unit GT15 CFEX CO8SET 65 2 56 External I O unit GT15 DIO GT15 DIOR 26 1 02 1 Prohibited areas for installing the control panel side installation unit with the extension unit do not exist 2 GT1675 VN GT1672 VN GT1662 VN cannot be used 6 3 Mounting Position 6 7 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE z o lt 4 a n z WIRING OPTION d For GT1665 GT1662 The control panel side installation unit cannot be installed within 25mm 0 98inch from the GOT When the other extension units are used the control panel side installation unit cannot be installed in the areas shown in the following figure Hole for installing GOT View from the rear side 130 15 Prohibited area for installation with an extension unit Extension unit Model GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 X Unit mm inch 5 12 0 59 GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 75ABUSL 2941 14 B
108. Nem oO screw F 2 Q ei e 3 3 Power Supply Specifications 3 17 3 3 2 For GOTs powered from the 24VDC power supply Specifications GT1675M STBD GT1675M VTBD GT1675 VNBD GT1695M XTBD GT1685M STBD GT1672 VNBD GT1655 VTBD GT1665M STBD GT1665M VTBD GT1662 VNBD Item Input power supply voltage 24VDC 25 20 Power consumption 60W or less 40W or less 38W or less 16W or less At backlight off 30W or less 26W or less 27W or less 14W or less 12A or less 75ms 67A or less 1ms Inrush current 12A or less 55ms maximum load j maximum load maximum load Allowable momentary power j 10 ms or less failure time Noise immunit 500Vp p noise voltage 1 Us noise width when measuring with a noise simulator under 25 to 60Hz A noise frequency Dielectric withstand voltage 500VDC for 1 minute across power terminals and earth Insulation resistance 10MQ or more across power terminals and earth by a 500V DC insulation resistance tester Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2 mm Applicable solderless teninal Solderess terminal for M3 screw RAV1 25 3 V2 S3 3 V2 N3A FV2 N3A i Applicable tightening torque Terminal block terminal 0 5 to 0 8 Nem screw 3 18 3 3 Power Supply Specifications 3 4 Battery Specifications E Applicable battery z The following batteries are applicable for GT16 z W gt GT15
109. Pan have reached the set times or more Warning Built in Flash ROM f The GOT must be replaced In that case Data backup and re setting are 509 needs replacement Change the ENNES X GOT needed The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually In such a case turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition times The value that is input as clock data is out of the input enabled range In this case the input value is not accepted 510 Clock data input out of range f x Confirm the input range of the value to be input as clock data and input the proper value again The backlight is shut off or the lighting status of the backlight is unstable 511 A blown backlight is detected If the error is detected repeatedly contact your local Mitsubishi X representative The capacity for the buffering area is insufficient in the build in flash 520 Insufficient Flash ROM capacity memory x Confirm whether there are no mistakes in specified buffering area size o The capacity for the buffering area is insufficient in the user memory Insufficient user memory RAM 521 capacity RAM x Confirm whether there are no mistakes in specified buffering area size The old file of different contents has been deleted and a new file has been 522 Unnecessary file deleted to created x create new file Note that the old file is deleted and the new file is created if the file of the same name with different contents ex
110. T power supply section in the specified torque range Undertightening can D cause a short circuit or malfunction 2 Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT Not doing so can cause a fire failure or malfunction So 22 This section describes wiring to the GOT power supply section PE For the connection to a controller refer to the following manual xu L gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2 GT Works2 For external dimensions of connection cable refer to the following lt Appendix1 External Dimensions a we 226 O a HINT Y aSa General preventive measures against noise There are two kinds of noises Radiated noise that is transmitted into the air and Conductive noise that is directly z transmitted along connected lines Countermeasures must be taken considering both kinds of noises and referring to the following 3 points 1 Protecting against noise 2 a Keep signal lines away from noise sources such as a power cable or a high power drive circuit b Shield the signal lines 2 Reducing generated noise a Use a noise filter etc to reduce the level of the noise generated due to a source such as a high power motor drive circuit b Attach a surge suppressor on the terminal of the molded case circ
111. T1662 VNBA Version A or later Apr 2010 GT1662 GT1662 VNBD Version A or later Apr 2010 GT1655 GT1655 VTBD Version A or later Jan 2011 To comply with the EMC Directive use the hardware version of a GOT shown above or laterwhen the GT16M V4 GT16M R2 GT16M V4R1 GT16M ROUT or GT16M MMR is mounted on the GOT When the hardware version of a GOT is earlier than the version shown above the GOT does not comply with the EMC Directive 5 7 5 3 EMC Directive Compliant System Configuration 5 3 2 Connection method Use the following methods to connect with the GOT to ensure compliance with the EMC Directive O Compliant with EMC Directive x Not compliant with EMC Directive Connection method GT16 gt Bus connection O Direct connection to CPU O O Computer link connection O lt gt MELSECNET H connection PLC to PLC network O a nz CC Link IE Controller Network connection O a 8 CC Link IE Field Network connection O CC Link connection intelligent device station O 9 CC Link connection via G4 x T T Ethernet connection O O a Oo GOT multi drop connection x Other connections oO For details about each connection method refer to the following manual S lt lt gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used Ww 2 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2 GT Works2 5 9 bE 2 When connecting the GOT to other c
112. UT side connectors 1 for each side GT15 ABUS For last GOT Number of IN side connectors 1 For A QnACPU Motion controller CPU A Series For intermediary and last GOT GT15 ABUS2 Number of IN and OUT side connectors 1 for connection standard model each side GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBUS2L For QCPU Q Mode Motion controller CPU Q Series connection slim model For last GOT Number of IN side connectors 1 For intermediary and last GOT Number of IN and OUT side connectors 1 for each side GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L For A QnACPU Motion controller CPU A Series connection slim model For last GOT Number of IN side connectors 1 For intermediary and last GOT Number of IN and OUT side connectors 1 for Serial communication unit each side GT15 RS2 9P For RS 232 interface connection connector type GT15 RS4 9S For RS 422 interface connection connector type GT15 RS4 TE For RS 422 interface connection terminal block type MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 Optical double loop unit Coaxial bus unit CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit GT15 J71GP23 SX Optical loop unit CC Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15 J71GF13 T2 Intelligent device station unit CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 Intelligent device station unit CC LINK Ver 2 compliant Serial multi drop connection unit
113. VGA GT1675 VN GT1672 VN GT16 60SLTT For 8 4 high intensity wide angle view TFT SVGA GT1665M S 3 GT16 60VLTT For 8 4 high intensity wide angle view TFT VGA GT1665M V 3 GT16 60VLTN For 8 4 TFT VGA GT1662 VN 2 1 Function version C or earlier 2 Function version D to G 3 Function version G or later 9 6 2 Replacement procedure of backlight E For GT16 90XLTT 7 Turn off the GOT 2 Disconnect the power supply cable and communication cable Remove the GOT from the control panel 3 Remove the extension unit cover on the right side of the GOT When extension units including bus connection units are mounted on the GOT remove the units 9 6 Backlight Replacement 9 7 5 The model and the production year and month are printed on the back of a backlight H01 or H02 is printed after the model H01 indicates the upper backlight and H02 indicates the lower backlight 6 Remove the cable connectors of the upper backlight H01 and the cable connectors of the lower backlight H02 from the GOT connectors 7 Disconnect the cable connector of the upper H01 backlight and the cable connector of the lower H02 backlight from the GOT side connectors Expanded figure of part A in step 4 TY 8 Pull out the upper backlight from the backlight replacement hole on the upper part of the GOT Pull out the lower backlight from the backlight replaceme
114. V_ Abbreviation of GT1665M VTBA GT1665M VTBD GT1662 GT1662 VN Abbreviation of GT1662 VNBA GT1662 VNBD GT1655 GT1655 V Abbreviation of GT1655 VTBD ene Abbreviation of GT1695 GT1685 GT1675 GT1672 GT1665 GT1662 GT1655 GT16 Handy GOT GT1595 GT1595 X Abbreviation of GT1595 XTBA GT1595 XTBD races GT1585V S Abbreviation of GT1585V STBA GT1585V STBD GT1585 S Abbreviation of GT1585 STBA GT1585 STBD GT1575V S Abbreviation of GT1575V STBA GT1575V STBD GT1575 S Abbreviation of GT1575 STBA GT1575 STBD GT1570 GT1575 V Abbreviation of GT1575 VTBA GT1575 VTBD GT1575 VN Abbreviation of GT1575 VNBA GT1575 VNBD GT1572 VN Abbreviation of GT1572 VNBA GT1572 VNBD Avice GT1565 V Abbreviation of GT1565 VTBA GT1565 VTBD GT1562 VN Abbreviation of GT1562 VNBA GT1562 VNBD GT1555 V Abbreviation of GT1555 VTBD GT155 GT1555 Q Abbreviation of GT1555 QTBD GT1555 QSBD GT1550 Q Abbreviation of GT1550 QLBD GOT1000 Series GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595 GT1585 GT1570 GT1560 GT1550 GT1455 Q Abbreviation of GT1455 QTBDE GT1455 QTBD GT145 GT1450 Q Abbreviation of GT1450 QLBDE GT1450 QLBD GT14 Abbreviation of GT1455 Q GT1450 Q GT1275 GT1275 V Abbreviation of GT1275 VNBA GT1275 VNBD GT1265 GT1265 V Abbreviation of GT1265 VNBA GT1265 VNBD GT12 Abbreviation of GT1275 GT1265 eres Abbreviation of GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT150 GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 Q Abbreviation of GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA GT1150 QLBD GT11
115. When formatting a USB memory to FAT32 Up to 32GB USB Full Speed 12Mbps Device 1ch Connector shape Mini B Application For connecting a personal computer Project data read write OS installation FA transparent function PART NAME AND SETTINGS Compact flash slot 1ch Connector shape TYPE Application Data transfer data storage GOT startup When formatting a CF card memory to FAT16 Up to 2GB When formatting a CF card memory to FAT32 Up to 32GB CF card Option function board For option function board mounting 1ch EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE Extension unit gt For communication unit option unit mounting 2ch Buzzer output Single tone tone length adjustable Outside the enclosure IP67 4 Inside the enclosure IP2X Protective structure External dimensions 397 15 63 W x 296 11 65 H x 61 2 40 D mm inch Panel cutting dimensions 383 5 15 10 W X 282 5 11 12 H mm inch INSTALLATION Weight mounting fixtures are not included 5 0kg 11 0Ib GT Designer3 Version1 01B or later C tible softw k OTPAD noun boca GT Designer2 Version2 90U or later WIRING OPTION 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 3 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Bright dots always lit and dark dots unlit may appear on a liquid crystal display panel due to its characteristics It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom as the liquid cry
116. aas 4 1 4 2 Part Names and Settings of the GT1685 eee cee eeeeeeene eee eeeaaeeeseeeaaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeseeenaeeeeeeeaaas 4 3 4 3 Part Names and Settings of the GT1675 GT1672 eeccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeteteeteceennsneaeeess 4 5 44 Part Names and Settings of the GT1665 GT 1662 00 22 ccccccecceeeeeeeeeceeeenecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeesecsneaeeess 4 7 4 5 Part Names and Settings of the GT1655 ooo cece ee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeseaaaes 4 9 5 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGEDIRECTIVE 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive cccccccceeceeeeeeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeegscaaaaaanaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeenaees 5 1 5 1 1 EMG directive 0 icc eececceee eee eene eee e ee tnne eee eet aae eee ee eaaaeee eee AEE EEA EEEE EER 5 2 5 12 Control panelis a ade caved vdeo ah detest pe EN 5 3 5 1 3 Noise filter power supply line filter ee cece eet e eects eete eee eeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaas 5 4 Requirements for Conpliance with the Low Voltage Directive ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeeeeeeeneaees 5 5 5 2 1 Standard subject to GOT 0 0 ceeeee erect eee eeetne eee eee eaeeee ee eaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeenaeeeeenaas 5 5 522 POWER SUPPIV seavecatesacecee idee a aE a a a a a A aadis 5 5 5 2 3 Control panel eee 5 6 S24 GUDAN oes S S 5 6 329 Exema Wnh sessen es A a a ican ld deane sted naidecenvenecenaeds 5 6 EMC Directive Compliant System Configuration
117. acklight The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually In such a case turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition time The dedicated GS is notifying that the display section power on addition time has reached 80 or more of the set time 503 Warning Display section needs The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times reset function x replacement soon after replacing the display section The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually In such a case turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition time The dedicated GS is notifying that the touching count of the touch key has reached 80 or more of the set count number 504 Warning Touch panel needs The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times reset function x replacement soon after replacing the touch key The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually In such a case turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition times 10 3 Error Message and System Alarm 10 23 Error 7 Channel No Error message Action code storage The dedicated GS is notifying that the built in flash memory writing times have reached 80 or more of the set times 505 Warning Built in Flash ROM The GOT must be replaced In that case Data backup and re setting are x needs replacement soon needed The GOT can also be restor
118. al display High intensity and wide angle view Screen size 12 1 Resolution 800 x 600 dots Display size 246 9 69 W Xx 184 5 7 26 H mm inch Display character 16 dot standard font 50 characters x 37 lines 2byte character Display 12 dot standard font 66 characters x 50 lines 2byte character section Display color 65536 colors Display angle Left Right 80 degrees Top 80 degrees Bottom 60 degrees Intensity of LCD only 470 cd m Intensity adjustment 8 level adjustment Life Approx 52 000 h Operating ambient temperature 25 C Backlight LED irreplaceable n backlight shutoff detection function is included Backlight off screen saving time can be set Life 2 Approx 60 000 h or longer Time when display luminance reaches 50 at the operating ambient temperature of 25 C Type Analog resistive film Key size Minimum 2 x 2 dots per key Touch panel Number of objects that can be Simultaneous presses not allowed simultaneously touched Only 1 point can be touched Life 1 million times or more operating force 0 98N max Detection length 1 39 37 m inch Human Detection range Left Right Top Bottom 70 degrees Sensor Detection delay time 0 to 4s Detection temperature Temperature difference between human body and ambient air 4 C or higher C drive Built in flash memory 15Mbytes for storing project data and OS Memory Life Number of write times
119. ames and Settings of the GT1655 4 10 9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE For the products sold in European countries the conformance to the EMC Directive which is one of the European Directives has been a legal obligation since 1996 Also conformance to the Low Voltage Directive another European Directives has been a legal obligation since 1997 Manufacturers who recognize their products must conform to the EMC and Low Voltage Directive are required to declare that their products conform to these Directives and put a CE mark on their products e Authorized representative in Europe Authorized representative in Europe is shown below Name Mitsubishi Electric Europe BV Address Gothaer strase 8 40880 Ratingen Germany 5 1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive EMC Directives are those which require any strong electromagnetic force is not output to the external Emission electromagnetic interference and It is not influenced by the electromagnetic wave from the external Immunity electromagnetic sensitivity Items 5 1 1 thru 5 1 3 summarize the precautions to use GOT and configure the mechanical unit in order to match the EMC directives Though the data described herein are produced with our best on the basis of the requirement items and standards of the restrictions gathered by Mitsubishi they do not completely guaranteed that all mechanical unit manufactured according to the data do not always match the above directive
120. atus The power line connected to the power or servo amplifier and the communication cable such as bus O Mixed O Not mixed connection cable or network cable are mixed in the duct Measure for the cables mixed Wiring the power line and communication cable in the panel without mixing them in the duct can reduce the influence of noise O Effective O Ineffective 2 Panel outside wiring P O Installed ower line Current The power line and communication together 4 status a cable are installed together O Not installed Communication cable together Leading the power line and Fig Power line 4 0 o ae 3 A Communication cable communication cable outside the Hf panel at separate places can make Measure the communication cable less for the influenced by noise from the power i 23 O Effective cables line Installing the communication installed Cine Wiring Separator cable apart from the power line or O Ineffective together Fi using a separator made of metal in 2 100mm or more B Communication cable the duct as shown in Fig B can make the communication cable less influenced by noise 10 6 10 1 GOT Restoration Sheet 3 Wiring of GOT s FG cable and power line A GOT Current status Power for the power equipment The FG cable and power line of the GOT are installed together O Installed together O Not installed together Y
121. ay section Control panel etc e The GOT will be deteriorated earlier if it is used at the mounting angle other than the above Therefore the temperature inside the control panel should be within 40 C j When mounting a multimedia unit GT16MMMR MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 or CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 the operating ambient temperature must be reduced 5 C against the maximum values described in general specifications 6 5 Installation Procedure The GOT mounting procedure is as follows For the panel cutting dimensions of each GOT refer to the following lt 3 6 2 Panel Cutting Dimensions 1 Before installing the GOT to the panel or others connect the GOT and battery connectors For other than GT1665 GT1662 For GT1655 Open the battery cover Open the CF card cover For GT1665 GT1662 Remove the battery holder 6 10 6 4 Control Panel Inside Temperature and Mounting Angle 2 After confirming the battery is stored in the battery holder insert the battery connector into the connector of the GOT For other than GT1665 GT1662 For GT1655 3 Insert the GOT into the panel opening from the front side GOT SS SJ Panel opening 6 5 Installation Procedure 6 11 4 Place the mounting fixtures included with GOT on the mounting fixture attaching part of the GOT and fix them by ti
122. bled product investigation q The GOT reset switch does not operate when the bus connection is used 2 When the bus connection is used do not power the GOT ON again OFF gt ON while the power of the PLC is ON When powering the GOT ON again OFF gt ON power OFF the PLC before that 3 By powering OFF the GOT an error occurs in the control station when the MELSECNET H connection is used or in the master station when the CC Link connection intelligent device station is used 5 Troubled product investigation When malfunction of the GOT is not improved please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service Depending on the problem details we may ask you to return the troubled product to us In that case please attach the GOT status check sheet GOT installation status check sheet and the system configuration check sheet filled out with details of your system 10 1 GOT Restoration Sheet 10 5 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION io e e x N WW a a 2 ie APPENDICES E GOT installation status check sheet Check the current installation status of the GOT you are using against the GOT installation status described in the upper column of items 1 to 7 When the measure described in the lower column is needed take the measure for the current status When the measure is taken check the result Effective or Ineffective 1 Panel inside wiring Current st
123. cable i p 9 pins female a cable data transfer cable z FX communication p f 4 o For connecting FXCPU communcation function tO function adaptor GT01 C30R2 25P Cable length 3m ZZ i adaptor D sub 25 pins connector and GOT bE connection cable im an GT09 C30R2 9P Cable length 3 m Computer link For connecting computer link module serial connection cable communication module and GOT GT09 C30R2 25P Cable length 3 m E w GT01 C10R4 8P Cable length 1m Z OE FXCPU direct i gay connectionicable FX GT01 C30R4 8P Cable length 3m For connecting FXCPU MINI DIN 8 pins a 5 a connector and GOT communication rae r h GT01 C100R4 8P Cable length 10m For connecting FXCPU communication function function extension extension board MINI DIN 8 pins connector and board connection GT01 C200R4 8P Cable length20m GoT cable GT01 C300R4 8P Cable length 30m z lt GT01 C30R4 25P Cable length 3m For connecting QnA ACPU Motion controller CPU 2 RS 422 QnA A FXCPU direct A series FXCPU D sub 25 pins connector and GT01 C100R4 25P Cable length 10m cable connection cable GOT sempater link GT01 C200R4 25P Cable length 20m For connecting FA CNV CBL and GOT connection cable For connecting computer link module serial GT01 C300R4 25P Cable length 30m communication module and GOT 0 GT09 C30R4 6C Cable length 3 m Z Computer link G MO9 CI00REGC Cable length 10 m For connecting computer link module serial connection cable GT09 C200R4
124. ce included as standard in GT 16 project data can be downloaded uploaded For download upload of project data with the Ethernet connection BootOS and standard monitor OS should be installed in the GOT in advance so that the GOT and PC can communicate with each other via Ethernet by setting Communication Settings Refer to the following manual for details cs GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Chapter 8 COMMUNICATION WITH GOT GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Chapter 8 TRANSFERRING DATA 2 The B drive or E drive cannot be set as the OS boot drive Precautions for setting OS boot drive to A Standard CF Card 1 2 3 GOT startup time When the OS boot drive is set to A Standard CF Card the GOT startup time with the A drive takes longer than that with the C drive The GOT startup time with the A drive differs depending on the CF card type the numbers of extended function OSs and option OSs and project data size Handling CF card during booting OS Do not remove the CF card and do not turn off the CF card access switch during booting the OS Doing so causes the boot to fail As a result the GOT does not start correctly Corrective actions when OS cannot be booted The OS cannot be booted in the following conditions Take the following corrective actions and then boot the OS again Condition Corrective action The type of the GOT to be used differs from the GOT typ
125. cident Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction If a communication fault including cable disconnection occurs during monitoring on the GOT communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative For bus connection The CPU becomes faulty and the GOT becomes inoperative For other than bus connection The GOT becomes inoperative A system where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT communication fault will occur Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device that displays and outputs serious warning Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction DESIGN PRECAUTIONS N WARNING Incorrect operation of the touch switch s may lead to a serious accident if the GOT backlight is gone out When the GOT backlight goes out although the POWER LED blinks green orange and the display section dims the input of the touch switch s remains active This may confuse an operator in thinking that the GOT is in screensaver mode who then tries to release the GOT from this mode by touching the display secti
126. cklight Not switching off the power in all phases may cause an electric shock Not removing the unit from the control panel can cause injury due to a drop TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES Do not disassemble or modify the unit Doing so can cause a failure malfunction or fire Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the GOT directly Doing so can cause a unit malfunction failure The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault When unplugging the cable connected to GOT do not hold and pull the cable portion Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault Before insert remove the connection cable power off the GOT Not doing so can cause a failure or malfunction When replacing the cold cathode tube backlight wear gloves Otherwise it may cause you to be injured Replace the cold cathode tube backlight more than 5 minutes later after shutting off the GOT power Failure to do so may cause a burn due to the heat of the cold cathode tube backlight Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted on the unit Doing so can cause the battery to be damaged due to the drop or the impact making the battery liquid to leak in the battery Do not use but dispose the batte
127. confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for thirty six 36 months after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be forty two 42 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The customer shall be responsible for the primary failure diagnosis unless otherwise specified If requested by the customer Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or its representative firm may carry out the primary failure diagnosis at the customer s expence The primary failure diagnosis will h
128. connection cable with a new one 10 14 10 2 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection 10 3 Error Message and System Alarm This chapter describes the error message and system alarm displayed in the GOT As the error code and error message displaying functions when an error occurs at the GOT controller or network there are two kinds system alarm and advanced system alarm For details of the system alarm and advanced system alarm refer to the following K gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions GT Designer2 VersionL Screen Design Manual Error code and channel No e Error codes can also be confirmed in the error code storage area of the system information function The channel No where an error is occurring can be confirmed with the GOT special register GS262 to 264 For details of the system information and GOT special register refer to the following manual C gt gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals GT Designer2 VersionL Screen Design Manual 10 3 1 Error contents display This section describes the example for displaying error code and error message on GOT E Popup displaying the error code and error message Advanced alarm popup display System alarm If an error occurs the error code and error message can be popup displayed on the front of the monitor screen As alarms are popup displayed regardless of the screen type t
129. connector fixing Visual check Not loose connectors screws Check GOT internal Replace with new battery battery voltage status in when the current battery has 5 Battery Time setting of the No alarm appears reached the specified life 9 1 Daily Inspection Utility lt gt Basic Utility 2 1 1 Time setting span even if battery voltage low is not displayed 9 3 Cleaning Method z lt Use GOT always in a clean condition zi To clean the GOT wipe the dirty part with a soft cloth using neutral detergent or ethanol A T z a Pra 2z Clean f 2 Q fe orner buttons simt a W all a Y N uw Q A FA W a a lt XX A POINT Precautions for cleaning Do not use solvents such as acetone benzene toluene and alcohol since they may cause the protective sheet to be deformed or the dissolvable paint on the surface to peel off In addition do not use spray solvents since they may cause the electrical failure of the GOT and peripheral devices 9 3 Cleaning Method 9 3 9 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement E Low battery voltage detection and replacement The battery is used for backing up the present time or the maintenance time notification data It is recommended that you replace battery periodically Refer to the following for the replacement procedure gt 8 3 2 mBattery The battery voltage low detection can be confir
130. controller manufactured by each corporation Indicating controller Generic term for indicating controller manufactured by each corporation Control equipment Generic term for control equipment manufactured by each corporation CHINO controller Abbreviation of indicating controller manufactured by CHINO CORPORATION PC CPU module Abbreviation of PC CPU Unit manufactured by CONTEC CO LTD GOT server Abbreviation of GOTs that use the server function GOT client Abbreviation of GOTs that use the client function Windows font Abbreviation of TrueType font and OpenType font available for Windows Differs from the True Type fonts settable with GT Designer3 Intelligent function module Indicates the modules other than the PLC CPU power supply module and I O module that are mounted to the base unit MODBUS RTU Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a serial communication MODBUS TCP Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a TCP IP network HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Following symbols are used in this manual 9 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement Low battery voltage detection and replacement The battery is used for backing up the present time or the maintenance time notification data It is recommended that you replace battery periodically Refer to the following for t
131. crea aiaceecvusitasereesduiaceeettiagedebrvadiieecesduieeerenusegeersias 9 2 9 2 Periodic INSPECHOMNN esrin aai a ai aia a Ea aE EA a EAEE 9 2 9 3 Cleaning Method cece tt tr i ne ne eee rete eer neee eee reee eee naeeeeeeeeeeeree 9 3 9 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement 0 cceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeseesteeeeesenaaes 9 4 9 5 Backlight Shutoff Detection and Replacement ceeceececeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeceeeeseenaeeeeeeenaaes 9 6 96 Backlight Replacement sssssoiai iiinn ar eE A 9 7 9 6 1 Applicable backlightsiniinarnaniesani ia a i ia EA Aia aE AA a 9 7 9 6 2 Replacement procedure of backlight c ccccccceceeeeeeeeceeceeecaeceeeeeeeeeeesecseeceacecaeeeeeeeetes 9 7 10 TROUBLESHOOTING 10 1 GOT Restoration Seeba eedaatinee epi iey anges Glnesead heed edaeeees aecetes 10 1 10 2 Troubleshooting in BUS Connection 0 eee eee cent ee teeter ee eee ete eee ee taaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeesaeeeeessiaeeeeeseaees 10 12 10 241 Locating error pOSItIONS enire ia gag cectde pceedends peveeteatpacecedlia E E 10 12 10 2 2 Further locating error positions 2 cece cece ec cceenceceeeeeneeeceeeeeneeeceeseeneseeeseneaeeeeeseeaeeeeeneenaees 10 13 10 2 3 Specific example of troubleshooting ccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeceneneeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeseeseccasaeeeeeeeeess 10 14 10 3 Error Message and System Alarm ceeeeeeeeeienere erent ee erties eee tiieee eee eieeeeeeeeieeeeesnieeeeeennaea 1
132. ctured by other company microcomputer temperature controller inverter servo amplifier CNC MODBUS R RTU or MODBUS R TCP connection Produce the cable RS 232 cable RS 422 485 cable for connecting the GOT to a controller with reference to the following manual L gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2 GT Works2 GITAR i Configure the system to meet the EMC Directive specifications for the connected device when connecting the GOT to a controller The following gives the instructions to ensure the machinery comply with the EMC Directive However the manufacturer of the machinery must finally determine how to make it comply with the EMC Directives if it is actually compliant with the EMC Directives a For RS 422 485 cable e Each signal wire excluding SG and FG should be made into a two power wires and connected then twisted SDA pone RDA a ae p RDA z SDA O aa Make the SG wire more than two wires and connect b For RS 232 cable e Use a twisted pair style for each signal wire except SG FG with SG e DEE EE AAA RD SAU E E E DSR DR Ca DTR se SG Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the position as illustrated below GOT side Ferrite Core PLC side ZCAT3035 1330 p mM mM o m Mo 3 94 a 100 or less 3 94 100 or le
133. d access switch x Check if the CF card or USB memory is readable o e e x N WW a a 2 0 The server does not work normally or the connection path to the server is Cannot connect to MES Server made up incorrectly 615 Check the Server Check the operating conditions of the server A Check the network to the server A aay The settings for the SNTP server are wrong or the network to the SNTP 2 616 Cannot connect to SNTP server is made up incorrectly x al Server Check the Server Check the operating conditions of the STNP server a Check the network to the SNTP server Check the CF card available area installation status cancellation of 630 Failed to save a video file X write protect format status and number of saved files Check the activation status of personal computer linkage software in file 631 Failed to save a video file on server the setting of Ethernet FTP function of GOT the network setting of X network GOT and file server and the available area of CF card installed in the GOT main unit 632 Error detected during Switch off the GOT and check the installation status of multimedia unit or x multimedia processing change the multimedia unit The version of the unit software Install the latest compatible multimedia unit software using the utility of 633 x is not the latest the GOT No space remaining in the a Change the CF card
134. de reader or RFID controller make Communication Settings for communications with a bar code reader or RFID controller For details of connection refer to the following manual lt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals for GT Works3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2 GT Works2 E Install USB peripheral devices 1 Open the USB environmental protection cover and firmly insert a USB peripheral devices connector to the USB interface so that the GOT automatically recognizes the USB memory For removing methods of the USB peripheral devices refer to the following L gt Basic Utility 4 3 7 USB device status display 2 For installing a USB mouse keyboard make the settings to use it 3 For how to set refer to the following K gt Basic Utility 2 3 7 USB mouse keyboard setting 8 5 Other Equipments Connected to the Main Unit 8 23 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION es WIRING zZ O a e Precautions for using a USB mouse keyboard 1 When using the mouse with wheel or special mouse A mouse with wheel or a mouse with three or more buttons can be used as a two buttons mouse The wheel or special button cannot be used In addition a mouse with special functions cannot be used in some models 2 When using upper compatible models of the Japanese 106 keyboard
135. ducts for GT Works3 Stored in CD ROM SH 080868ENG 1D7MC2 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 1 for GT Works3 Stored in CD ROM SH 080869ENG 1D7MC3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 2 for GT Works3 Stored in CD ROM SH 080870ENG 1D7MC4 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals for GT Works3 E Extended and option function manuals Manual Name Stored in CD ROM Packaging SH 080871ENG 1D7MCS5 Manual Number GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD ROM Model code SH 080858ENG 1D7MA7 GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD ROM SH 080859ENG 1D7MA8 GOT1000 Series User s Manual Extended Functions Option Functions for GT Works3 E GT SoftGOT1000 manuals Manual Name GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD ROM Packaging Stored in CD ROM SH 080863ENG 1D7MB3 Manual Number Model code SH 080860ENG 1D7MA9 E GT16 manuals Manual Number Manual Name Packaging Model code SH 080928ENG GT16 User s Manual Hardware Stored in CD ROM 1D7MD3 SH 080929ENG GT16 User s Manual Basic Utility Stored in CD ROM 1D7MD4 JY997D41201 GT16 Handy GOT User s Manual Stored in CD ROM JY997D41202 09R821 E GT15 manuals Manual Number Mode
136. dust lamp soot conductive dust corrosive gas or combustible gas high temperature condensing wind or rain or to vibrations and impact 2 Failure to do so can cause an electric shock fire malfunction or product damage or deterioration 2 Do not drop chips or wire scraps near the ventilation window of the GOT when processing screw holes or wiring fe Failure to do so can cause a fire failure or malfunction z 3 Tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range ea Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop short circuit or malfunction ao Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the unit Make sure to install the connection cable to the connector specified during the power OFF Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to the poor contact A 5 S m 6 1 Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting GOT eac N Install the GOT and the CF card extension unit on the control panel out of the way for the equipment inside the control panel Do not install the GOT and the unit in prohibited areas for the installation lu POINT 28 j EAO zz E E Applicable cable pam Some cables may need to be longer than the specified dimensions when connecting to the GOT Therefore consider the connector dimensions and bending radius of the cable as well for installation z E w SOF TLO 23 gt a z o lt 4 a n z WIRING OPTION 6 1 Control Pa
137. e If the line is too close to the device separate the line 100 mm or more from the device c Locating the module where an error occurs Based on the PLC CPU error codes and special resister information locate a specific module where an error occurs By the method stated above correct the sequence program or replace the faulty module with a new one and check whether the error occurs If the error continues to occur it may have another cause Referring to 10 2 2 Further locating error positions locate the error position further 10 2 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection 10 2 2 Further locating error positions a Z lt If the function of the PLC cannot be recovered even when the module on which an error occurs is replaced with a new 2 one the error may be caused by the effect from another module Z z Disconnect the extension cables and bus connection cables in order from the modules starting from the module located Lo furthest from the operating position in the system and check for the status of occurrence of the error each time the Z 5 cables are disconnected until the error does not occur ze The module or extension cables bus connection cables disconnected immediately before the error does not occur are considered to cause the error Examples of the ways of further locating error positions are shown below When use the extension base unit QNASCPU Example 1 Example 2 Turn off the power of the GOT Turn off t
138. e data Prepare the CF card where the OSs and project data of the same GOT set with GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 stored in the CF card type as the GOT to be used are written Delete unnecessary data stored in the memory of GOT For details refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual The GOT has insufficient memory The CF card access switch is off Turn on the CF card access switch 1 2 Rough Pre operation Procedure 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW 2 1 Overall Configuration The overall configuration of GOT is as follows For the connection methods applicable to GOT1000 series and cable refer to the following lt _ GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used z fe q 5 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2 GT Works2 9 1S SYSTEM Yn ae O E lt x o i O W Q n Commercia ilable 2 Zz RS 422 485 Refer to z Extension Refer to conversion 8 4 1 o unit cable zo 2z bE Fam Refer to aw CF card 8 3 1 QG keyboai Commercial ilable Protective Refer to sheet 8 5 1 O m m Protective a wu gt Refer to cover for oil 2 z z 8 3 1 O a HOS uwu gt a RS 422 Refer to j gt Memory card conversion 8 4 1 Z adaptor unit rA O z z Fe Yn zZ O zZ x Q H Q 2 1 Overal
139. e found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued CON ou A 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal t
140. e of the system information may have been turned ON when the device was set and the screen was switched to the forced screen saving status O Lit in orange Check the setting of the read device When no problem is found in the setting proceed to 1 d The backlight has run out O Blinks in green orange Replace the backlight If the GOT is not restored proceed to 1 d The power is not supplied O Not lit When the power is supplied the GOT hardware may be faulty 10 1 GOT Restoration Sheet Check if the power is supplied If the GOT is not restored proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation Phenomenon d Screen display O The screen is completely black Cause status Action The LCD or BootOS may be failty Perform the following in order 1 Reinstalling BootOS 2 Reinstalling standard monitor OS If the GOT is not restored by 1 and 2 perform the following 3 Reinstalling CoreOS and then standard monitor OS If the GOT is not restored by the above operations proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation O The screen is completely white The GOT hardware may be faulty Proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation OO Aline is displayed on the The GOT hardware may be faulty MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION o e e x N WW a a 2 0 screen Example A vertical line is displayed IE The screen disp
141. e way in Insert the top plate of the backlight here Backlight top plate 9 Connect the backlight cable connector to the GOT board connector Do not put the cables of the backlight back to the cable holder A Assemble the case in the reverse procedure of disassembly Tighten the fixing screws on the GOT rear face with a torque of 0 36 to 0 48 Nem When installing the case make sure that the cables are not stuck between the case and the GOT 9 6 Backlight Replacement 2 GT1675M VTBA with hardware version B Manufacture year and month February 2012 or later and GT1675M VTBD with hardware version C Manufacture year and month February 2012 or later 7 Turn off the GOT MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 2 Disconnect the power supply cable and the communication cable Remove the GOT from the control panel 3 Remove the right extension unit cover of the GOT Remove an extension unit including a bus connection unit if it is mounted 5 6 7 Pullout the backlight so that the backlight does not hit the packing 9 6 Backlight Replacement 9 13 8 Install a new backlight so that its top plate is inserted between the metal parts of the backlight replacement hole When inserting a new backlight into the backlight replacement hole of the GOT make sure not to damage the sheaths of the cables Insert the backlight all the wa
142. ecting GOT to KEYENCE PLC RS 232 erie GT09 C30R21102 9S Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to KEYENCE multi communication unit GT09 C30R21103 3T Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to KEYENCE multi communication unit GT09 C30R41101 5T Cable length 3m RS 422 GT09 C100R41101 5T Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to KEYENCE multi communication unit cable GT09 C200R41101 5T Cable length 20m GT09 C300R41101 5T 2 2 Component List Cable length 30m E Connection cables for SHARP PLCs Sold separately Product nan Model name Description name RS 232 GT09 C30R20601 15P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC cable GT09 C30R20602 15P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC GT09 C30R40601 15P Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40601 15P Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC GT09 C200R40601 15P Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40601 15P Cable length 30m GT09 C30R40602 15P Cable length 3m RS 422 GT09 C100R40602 15P Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC cable GT09 C200R40602 15P Cable length 20m E Connection cables for JTEKT PLCs Sold separately GT09 C300R40602 15P Cable length 30m GT09 C30R40603 6T Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40603 6T Cable length 10m GT09 C200R40603 6T Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40603 6T Cable length 30m For connecting GOT to SHARP link unit Product ar Model name Description name RS 232 ie GT09 C30R212
143. ection sheet for 15 ntiglare Frame White 5 sheets Cc A Clear Frame White 5 sheets A C ear covered USB environmental protection cover ype 5 sheets o GT16 80PSCB GT16 80PSGB GT16 80PSCW 4 GT16 80PSGW 4 GT16 90PSCB 0127 ear 5 sheets ntiglare 5 sheets Protection sheet for 12 1 J 7 ntiglare Frame White 5 sheets C A Clear Frame White 5 sheets A C ear covered USB environmental protection cover ype 5 sheets o gt GT16 70PSCB GT16 70PSGB GT16 70PSCW 4 GT16 70PSGW 4 GT16 90PSCB 0127 Q ear 5 sheets gt ntiglare 5 sheets Q ear Frame White 5 sheets Protection sheet for 10 4 Antiglare Frame White 5 sheets Clear covered USB environmental protection cover type 5 sheets 8 3 2 mProtective sheet 8 3 Option OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION es WIRING z O a e Product name Protective sheet Mode Description Reference GT16 60PSCB Clear 5 sheets GT16 60PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets GT16 60PSCW Clear Frame White 5 sheets 7 Protection sheet for 8 4 GT16 60PSGW 4 Antiglare Frame White 5 sheets Clear covered USB GT16 90PSCB 012 7 environmental protection cover type 5 sheets 8 3 2 mProtective GT16 50PSCB Clear 5 sheets
144. ed by turning off the notification signal manually In such a case turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition times The dedicated GS is notifying that the backlight power on addition time has reached the set time or more 506 Warning Backlight needs The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times reset function x replacement after replacing the backlight The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually In such a case turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition time The dedicated GS is notifying that the display section power on addition time has reached the set time or more 507 Warning Display section needs The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times reset function x replacement after replacing the display section The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually In such a case turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition time The dedicated GS is notifying that the touching count of the touch key has reached the set count number or more 508 Warning Touch panel needs The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times reset function x replacement after replacing the touch key The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually In such a case turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition times The dedicated GS is notifying that the built in flash memory writing times A
145. eeeeeeeeeeseceaaaaeaeceeeeeeeeeessessansaaeeeeeees 2 2 221 COT sciiirrececd dist chaccedhiay cca ed anced casas geneadbiawesacedcanenas E dditan celeaa speed dGls peeeediiniveendiiaepdedaans 2 4 2 2 2 ODUN rna e esha leas akeud a aaa daansunddaderaaialiuaesatadd eantea diatervahe houses dene 2 5 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1 General Specifications iina aii aiie a adaa adaa aaa aadi 3 1 3 2 Performance Specificati NS ssaki aaa aaa AAEE EATE AEAEE AE AEREE 3 2 SA E E e a E E EEE A NAE N E E 3 2 322 GTIN rocr EE E AAEE AEAEE 3 5 3 2 3 GT1675M S GT1675M V GT1675 VN GT1672 VN 0 00 ececccccceecneeeeeeeeeseeeesesesneeeesennaaes 3 8 3 2 4 GT1665M S GT1665M V GT1662 VN ooo ee cecccceceecccteeeeeecetaeeeeesesaeeeeeesesaeeeeessntaeeeessensaes 3 11 Seo GT AG a a a cata E gc Pees scat aac cat dee eee ne reat desc nns e ens eae 3 14 3 3 Power Supply Specifications cccccccecceceeeeeeecenecaeceeceeeeeeeeeeesacacaaacaecaeeeeeeeeeeeseseecseeceecaeeeeeeeeess 3 17 3 3 1 For GOTs powered from the 100 to 240VAC power supply eceeeeeeeeeeeectteeeeeeeeteeees 3 17 3 3 2 For GOTs powered from the 24VDC power supply 2 ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeneaeeeeeeeees 3 18 3 4 Battery Specifications eee cece tee ee cent eee eeee eee eeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeiaeeeeeeeaas 3 19 PART NAME AND SETTINGS 4 1 Part Names and Settings of the GT1695 oc ce ener ee eeeenee eee eeeaaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeneeeeeeea
146. efore replacement bE replacement eim an GT15 70ATT 98 A985GOT A870GOT SWS A870GOT TWS 10 4 A8GT 70GOT TW GT1675 5 GT15 70ATT 87 Em E A8GT 70GOT TB Z9 z A8GT 70GOT SW gH musa A8GT 70GOT SB GT15 60ATT 97 A97 O GOT GT15 60ATT 96 A960GOT A870GOT EWS KB A8GT 70GOT EW 5 Attachment A8GT 70GOT EB GT15 60ATT 87 Z A77GOT EL S5 A77GOT EL S3 8 4 GT1665 A77GOT EL A77GOT CL S5 A77GOT CL S3 5 A77GOT CL Z GT15 60ATT 77 A77GOT L S5 A77GOT L S3 A77GOT L GT15 50ATT 95W A956WGOT 5 7 GT1655 GT15 50ATT 85 A85 O GOT z Pol It can be replaced from GP250 _ or GP260 _ manufactured by Digital Electronics Corporation 2 2 Component List E Drawing software Sold separately SW1DNC GTWK3 E Drawing software for GOT2000 GOT 1000 series GT Designer2 SW2D5C GTD2 J Drawing software for GOT1000 GOT900 series Product name GT Works3 E PC connection cable Sold separately Product name Model name Description For connecting GOT D sub 9 pin female and GT01 C30R2 9S Cable length 3m i Project data PC D sub 9 pin female transfer cable GT09 C20USB 5P Cable length 2m For connecting GOT USB mini and PC USB GT09 C30USB 5P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT USB mini and PC USB 2 18 2 2 Component List 3 SPECIFICATIONS ZI ie 3 1 eneral Specifications D gt O Item Specifications 5 D
147. er than 1 and 2 above is required System configuration check sheet If malfunction etc occurs even after checking with 1 and 2 above please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service after filling out System configuration check sheet with details about your system When sending a troubled product attach the GOT restoration sheets GOT status check sheet BGOT installation status check sheet HSystem configuration check sheet checked in this section Please keep copies of the restoration sheets 10 1 GOT Restoration Sheet 10 1 10 2 E GOT status check sheet Check the GOT starting from 1 GOT status Proceed as instructed by Action 1 Status of the GOT Phenomenon Cause status a Frequency when the GOT does not operate an error occurs on the screen etc Action O Occurs always Occurrence frequency Example Once a month O Occurs sometimes Proceed to 1 b b Checking of the displayed error code system alarm Error code system alarm Example 460 Communication unit error O Can be checked O Cannot be checked Take the action for the error code system alarm or error message checked If the status does not change after the action is taken proceed to 1 c Proceed to 1 c c POWER LED O Lit in green The power is supplied normally Proceed to 1 d Screen saving is being performed The read devic
148. erface of GOT until it clicks 8 22 8 4 Cable 8 5 Other Equipments Connected to the Main Unit This section shows the equipments that can be connected to the GOT To connect a connectable equipment to the GOT make Communication Settings for communications with an equipment For details of connection refer to the following manual lt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals for GT Works3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2 GT Works2 8 5 1 Applicable other equipments connected to the main unit The following equipments are applicable for GT16 Product name Model Description USB memory Commercially available USB memory USB mouse Commercially available USB mouse USB peripheral devices USB keyboard Commercially available USB keyboard USB hub Commercially available USB hub Bar code reader Commercially available bar code reader RFID controller Commercially available RFID controller 4 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the validated models refer to Technical News GOT A 0010 List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series separately available or contact your local distributor 8 5 2 Installation procedure This section describes how to install equipment that can be used on the GOT E Connect a bar code reader or RFID controller To connect a bar co
149. ersion D or later Jan 2006 Computer link connection GOT RS 23z2 interface GOT RS 422 485 interface GT15 RS2T4 9P Version A or later GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S Version D or later Jan 2006 MELSECNET H connection PLC to PLC network GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 Version C or later Sep 2006 CC Link IE Controller Network connection GT15 J71GP23 SX Version A or later Dec 2007 CC Link IE Field Network connection GT15 J71GF13 T2 Version A or later Apr 2011 CC Link connection Intelligent device station GT15 J61BT13 Version C or later Sep 2006 Ethernet connection GOT Ethernet interface Microcomputer connection Serial GOT RS 232 interface GOT RS 422 485 interface GT15 RS2T4 9P Version A or later GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S Version D or later Jan 2006 Microcomputer connection Ethernet GOT Ethernet interface 5 9 5 3 EMC Directive Compliant System Configuration Continued to next page Connection method Third party PLC connection Communication unit used GOT S 232 interface Hardware version of the communication unit Production year and month GOT RS 422 485 interface GT15 RS2T4 9P Version A or later GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S Version D or later Jan 2006 Temperature controller connection GOT RS 23z2 interface GT15 RS2T4 9P Version A or later
150. esult Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit Doing so may damage the battery causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery If the battery is dropped or given an impact dispose of it without using Before touching the unit always touch grounded metal etc to discharge static electricity from human body etc Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Replace battery with GT15 BAT or GT11 50BAT by Mitsubishi electric Co only Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion Dispose of used battery promptly Keep away from children Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire TOUCH PANEL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION For the analog resistive film type touch panels normally the adjustment is not required However the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period of use elapses When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs execute the touch panel calibration When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs other objects may be activated This may cause an unexpected operation due to incorrect output or malfunction COLD CATHODE TUBE BACKLIGHT REPLACEMENT PRECAUTIONS N WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply of the GOT and the PLC CPU in the case of a bus topology and remove the GOT from the control panel before replacing
151. eteeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeee 7 11 8 OPTION 8 1 Communication Uiitisise ccs shania wt Rae ei nia ee rare ee eet 8 1 8 1 1 Applicable communication Unit cecccceecceccec cece eee eeeeeeceeeeaaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeesecsecesaceeaeeeeeeeeeess 8 1 8 1 2 Installing multiple extension Units in lAYErS 0 eee ee eeeee eect eeete ee eee eeaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeenaeeeeeteeaees 8 2 8 2 Option Wiaitscceeccisncceseskes nedecect dace ecdsuasaadgcdaeten sce daexsansaueceatuanuaddenioneccedasauaedindeha daedudccxvacdeateasnacaedins cea cteays 8 4 8 2 1 Applicable Option Unit sirsenis e dean seria dasdee Radia ee a a a 8 4 B23 OPTION sneons dvanctnaudes csiecceccnna aa a onlane ei a aaa aa a A 8 5 831 Applicable Option asine a a a aada a aaa a 8 5 8 3 2 Installation procedure emesis aiaiai aaa iaa a aai aii aaa iiaia 8 7 T S IEAI E T P ENNEA OLE EE N AA E E A A N E E ee 8 22 84 1 Applicable Cable scicacccicz cccsssivesccnnndeced ecduvechacecasunan a dcenwieaadecaws anadud aa i a a 8 22 842 Ipsialling procedu iiss deze evince tee aa aE 8 22 8 5 Other Equipments Connected to the Main Unit ccccceccecceeeeeeeeeeceneeeeeceeeeteeeeeeeeesennenaeeeeeeeeees 8 23 8 5 1 Applicable other equipments connected to the main Unit cceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 23 8 5 2 Installation procedure rasa a A T ener pats EA are 8 23 9 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 9 1 Dally INSPO COM tivisccztese deh deatedebieciiedecoteiteneevecesdinde
152. face MAC Address Serial number Jun 2009 or less 0000470100001 B Function version Boot OS version When the number of digits for the Boot OS version is 2 only the last digit is described Hardware version Manufacture month 1 to 9 Manufacture month X October Y November Z December A MITSUBISHI Manufacture year Last two digits of the year GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL MODEL GT1675M VTBA Jul 2009 or later Seoul 82021224 6 amp S00048 D Function version POWER MAX 90VA L_______ Boot OS version When the number of digits for MACADD _ _ n y the Boot OS version is 2 only the last digit is described SERIAL D820212216BS00048 D Hardware version DATE Me Manufacture month 1 to 9 Manufacture month X October Y November Z December Manufacture year Last two digits of the year A eI oe fe nels as yee il MADE_IN JAPAN Conformed standard MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION BACKLIGHT GT 16 70VLTTA Compatible backlight model For LED backlight LED For cold cathode tube backlight GT16 70VLTTA Backlight model E Packing box The standards conformed by a GOT can be confirmed by the label on the packing box Note that the position of the label differs depending on the model or shipment date ZA The conformed standards Ba such as CE are described App 14 Appendix3 Transportation Precautions When transportin
153. figuration Software MR Configurator Abbreviation of MRZJWL SETUPLIE type Servo Configuration Software FR Configurator Abbreviation of Inverter Setup Software FR SWL SETUP WE NC Configurator Abbreviation of CNC parameter setting support tool NC Configurator FX Configurator FP Abbreviation of parameter setting monitoring and testing software packages for FX3U 20SSC H SWLID5C FXSSC E FX3U ENET L Configuration tool Abbreviation of FX3U ENET L type Ethernet module setting software SW1D5 FXENETL E RT ToolBox2 Abbreviation of robot program creation software 3D 11C WINE MX Component Abbreviation of MX Component Version O SWOD5C ACT E SWOD5C ACT EA MX Sheet Abbreviation of MX Sheet Version SWC D5C SHEET E SWL D5C SHEET EA LCPU Logging Configuration Tool Abbreviation of LCPU Logging Configuration Tool SW1DNN LLUTL E E License key for GT SoftGOT1000 License Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT15 SGTKEY U GT15 SGTKEY P E License key for GT SoftGOT2 License key Abbreviations and generic terms Description AQ9GTSOFT LKEY P For DOS V PC License key FD SW5D5F SGLKEY J For PC CPU module E Others Abbreviations and generic terms Description IAI Abbreviation of IAI Corporation AZBIL Abbreviation of Azbil Corporatio
154. files in the CF card or USB memory are Image file error or invalid file 536 normal x format e Confirm whether any image file of invalid format is stored The key code input execution trigger was ON with the non target key 550 Invalid key code code set in the key code storage device x Confirm the key code supported by the object where error occurs f Switched language specifying KANJI other than Japanese without the Language switch failure Install 560 f option OS installed X optional functions Install the option OS Switched language specifying a KANJI region other than Japanese Language switch failure Load 561 without the option function board with add on memory installed x expansion memory board i Install the option function board with add on memory No font appropriate for the system language specified at the system Install the font appropriate for PP P os a y 939S Sp y 562 em language switching is installed x the specified system language Install the appropriate font The number of the set points of the recipe device exceeds the specified range 570 Recipe device points too large f es X Put the number of the set points of the recipe device within the specified range 571 Capacity shortage of user There is no empty area space in D drive x memory RAM Format the D drive in the memory to secure free area Advanced Recipe cannot be executed for advanced recipe file with 58
155. from entering the module during wiring Do not peel this label during wiring Before starting system operation be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation Plug the communication cable into the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting and terminal screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit Plug the QnA ACPU Motion controller A series bus connection cable by inserting it into the connector of the connected unit until it clicks After plugging check that it has been inserted snugly Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS WARNING Before performing the test operations of the user creation monitor screen such as turning ON or OFF bit device changing the word device current value changing the settings or current values of the timer or counter and changing the buffer memory current value read through the manual carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method During test operation never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system False output or malfunction can cause an accident STARTUP MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS A WARNING When power is on do not touch the terminals Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction
156. g z L Basic Utility 1 to 6 S Qqu gt 225 of Soe usa O KB 5 2 zZ 9 zZ x z Q H Q 1 1 Features 1 2 3 Improved monitoring performance and connectivity to FA devices e GT1695M X GT1685M S GT1675M S GT1675M V GT1665M S GT1665M V GT1655 V The TFT color liquid crystal display high intensity wide angle view and high definition type provides clear full color display and displays small characters clearly Displays digital images of BMP and other formats in 65536 colors GT1675 VN GT1672 VN GT1662 VN The TFT color liquid crystal display provides 4096 or 16 colors to offer a wide range of models that meet user requirements e Provides multi language display function based on Unicode2 1 True Type font and high speed drawing of beautiful text e High speed monitoring through high speed communication at maximum of 115 2kbps e High speed display and high speed touch switch response e The operation performance is improved by the analog touch panel e GT1695M X GT1685M S GT1675M S GT1675M V GT1665M S GT1665M V Applicable to a video RGB unit and a multimedia unit More efficient GOT operations including screen design startup adjustment management and maintenance works e GT1695M X GT1685M S GT1675M S GT1675M V GT1665M S GT1665M V GT1655 V 15MB user memory is included as standard GT1675 VN GT1672 VN GT1662 VN 11MB user memory is included as standard The RS 232 i
157. g it to the PC which is equipped with the PCMCIA interface Refer to the following for the details related to CF card lt 8 3 Option 7 Fit the memory card in the memory card adaptor LG gt LA CF card Memory card adaptor 8 12 8 3 Option E Option function board 7 Power OFF the GOT 2 Remove the extension unit cover Interface 1 side of GOT rear face For GT1655 V remove the extension unit cover Interface 2 side 3 Install the option function board in the option function board interface When the extension unit is installed in GOT remove the installed extension unit And do not touch the board in the GOT when install the option function board KZ yl typ oO 5 After the installation of option function board attach the extension unit cover For installation of extension unit install the extension unit OPTION 8 3 Option 8 13 E Battery Replace battery periodically by referring to 3 4 Battery Specifications 1 Keep the GOT power supply on for 10 minutes or more and turn it off Executes step 1 to 6 within 5 minutes of powering the GOT power supply off 2 The battery is stored in the back of the GOT Replace the battery as shown in the following figure For GT1695 GT1685 GT1675 GT1672 For GT1655 Open the battery cover Open the CF card cover For GT1665 GT1662 Remove the battery holder 3 Remove the old
158. g lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations Appendix 3 1 Relevant models The battery for the GOT1000 Series is classified as shown in the table below GT15 BAT a Non dangerous Battery for GOT1000 Series Lithium battery GT11 50BAT goods Appendix 3 2 Transportation guidelines Products are packed properly in compliance with the transportation regulations prior to shipment When repacking any of the unpacked products to transport it to another location make sure to observe the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations IMDG Code and other local transportation regulations For details please consult your transportation company App 15 Appendix4 How to Choose Drive For using a CF card select the A or B drive according to the following 1 Adrive The CF card interface built in the GOT is used as the A drive 2 B drive The following two units can be used as the B drive CF card unit When an additional drive is used use the CF card unit as the B drive of the GOT CF card extension unit When an additional drive is used use the CF card extension unit as the B drive of the GOT Use the unit when a CF card interface is needed on the control panel E Example of how to use CF card unit Infrequently used data including project data are saved to a CF card and frequently used data including alarm histories and operation logs are saved to another CF card The data can be saved in each C
159. ghtening surge is applied to the product AC power type Power line between line and ground 2kV Power line between lines 1kV Data communication port 1kV DC power type Power line between line and ground 0 5kV Power line between lines 0 5kV Data communication port 1kV EN61000 4 6 Conducted RF immunity Immunity test in which a noise inducted on the power and signal lines is applied Power line 10V Data communication port 10V VOLTAGE EN61000 4 8 Power supply frequency magnetic field immunity Test for checking normal operations under the circumstance exposed to the ferromagnetic field noise of the power supply frequency 50 60Hz 30 A m EN61000 4 11 EN61000 4 29 Instantaneous power failure and voltage dips immunity Test for checking normal operations at instantaneous power failure AC power type 0 5 cycle 0 interval 1 to 10s 250 300 cycle 0 10 12 cycle 40 25 30 cycle 70 DC power type 10ms interval 1 to 10s 1 The GOT is an open type device device installed to another device and must be installed in a conductive control panel The above test items are conducted in the condition where the GOT is installed on the conductive control panel and combined with the Mitsubishi PLC 2 QP Quasi peak value Mean Average value 3 The above test items are conducted in the following conditions 30M 230MHz QP 40dBHV m 10m in measurement range 2
160. ghtening the mounting screws in the torque range of 0 36 to 0 48N m Failure to do so may distort the panel and make a surface waviness on the protective sheet Magnified figure Magnified figure For GT1695 Fix the GOT with 8 mounting fixtures For other then GT1695 Fix the GOT with 4 mounting fixtures 5 A protection film is attached on the display section of GOT prior to shipment Remove the film when the installation is compelted Remove the protective film of the GOT When the user continues using the GOT with the protective film the film may not be removed Precautions after battery connection Make sure to turn on the GOT power supply once upon completion of battery connection Failure to do somay decrease the battery life 6 12 6 5 Installation Procedure 7 WIRING ZI Ww gt WARNING 5 e Before starting wiring always switch off the GOT power externally in all phases Not doing so may cause an electric shock product damage or malfunction 5 CAUTION z2 26 e Make sure to ground the FG terminal LG terminal and functional ground terminal of the GOT power supply aa section with a ground resistance of 1000 or less solely for the GOT Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the z product F Not doing so can cause a fire or failure g O Tighten the terminal screws of the GO
161. he connector used for the RS 232 interface of GT1675 and GT1672 is as follows Manufacturer DDK Ltd Model name 17LE 23090 27 D4CK or equivalent product Connector used for the RS 422 485 interface The specification of the connector used for the RS 422 485 interface of GT1675 and GT1672 is as follows Manufacturer Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co Ltd Model name HDR EC14LFDT1 SLE or equivalent product 4 3 Part Names and Settings of the GT1675 GT1672 4 6 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS z lt w no lt 0 zz 22 Par awn EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 4 4 Part Names and Settings of the GI1665 GT1662 sh n _ g p 21 12 13 14 20 17 16 15 4 7 4 4 Part Names and Settings of the GT1665 GT1662 No Name Description Lit in green Power is correctly supplied Lit in orange Screen saving 1 POWER LED Blinks in orange green Blown back light bulb Not lit Power is not supplied ne F A m 2 Display screen Displays the Utility and the user creation screen 2 3 Touch key For operating the touch switches
162. he error occurred will not be overlooked Oia B 348 og MIE T 04 6 1 13 20 Power mod Pop up generated alarms regardless of the screen E Displaying error code and error message in a list Advanced system alarm display If error has occurred error code and error message can be displayed on the list set with the screen Multiple errors can be displayed or the history of display can be recorded Occurred tae 10 25 loaie 8 05 Message Restore Check Temp error Fuse error 11 25 10 45 Create a screen to display alarms and confirm the details of the alarms and take measures 10 3 Error Message and System Alarm 10 15 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 9 e e x N WW a a 2 O APPENDICES E Checking error messages with the utility Utility The error code and error message can be checked with the system alarm display of the utility when the object is not 10 16 set C Basic Utility 5 1 2 System alarm Error code and reference manual Channel No Error source Error code Description storage Reference destination 1 0 to 99 User s manual of the ACPU Error code of CPU for ACPU Value of D9008 connected with GOT Error code of the following controllers Controller FXCPU GS263 User s manual of the controller 400 to
163. he panel having the GOT When a single ground cable is led from the panel having a control equipment such as PLC in the panel having the GOT the cable may need to be directly connected to the terminal block of the GOT Ground cable led from the panel having the control equipment 7 6 7 3 Grounding The malfunction occurred by the potential difference caused by the groundings in such a case may be prevented by reducing the voltage with the following measure example 1 where the voltage is reduced Measure example 1 Refer to the measure examples 1 1 and 1 2 below When any potential difference occurs between the ground cable and the panel having the GOT and the GOT is influenced by the potential difference connect another ground cable to the panel When taking of measure 1 1 is difficult since the wiring cannot be done for example perform the wiring as shown in 1 2 Connection cable Connection Ground cable Ground cable Use a short and thick wire as possible Ground to the panel Ground to the panel Measure example 1 1 Measure example 1 2 If the GOT is affected by noise when measure example 1 is taken the influence of noise may be reduced with the following measure example 2 Measure example 2 Refer to the measure examples 2 1 and 2 2 below When the noise generated from the panel affects the GOT even if measure example 1 is taken attach the ferrite core KITAGAW
164. he power of the GOT 9 e e x N WW a a 2 0 Turn off the power of the PLC Turn off the power of the PLC Disconnect the bus connection cable OUT side from the GOT located one Disconnect the bus connection cable IN side from the final stage GOT stage before the final stage Turn on the power of the PLC Turn on the power of the PLC Turn on the power of the GOT Turn on the power of the GOT APPENDICES If an error does not occur the final stage GOT may be faulty If an error does not occur the final 1 A g stage GOT and the bus connection Se 1 D cable before the final stage may be I La faulty Ssa Repeat the examples 1 and 2 above to locate error positions Notes on narrowing the error part range 1 When disconnecting the extension base units in order use only an ENDinstruction for the sequence program and any error resulting from the sequence program will not occur and the status of occurrence of errors will be obtained easily 2 When the frequency of occurrence of an error is low check the error by taking a rather long time with the modules disconnected The checks stated above are effective to locate a noise invading route when the mis operation is caused by noise 10
165. he replacement procedure lt gt 832 mBattery The battery voltage low detection can be confirmed by the utility and system alarm Refer to the following for details of the battery status display by the utility lt gt Basic Utility 2 1 1 Time setting By using system alarm the message that notifies the battery voltage has decry sed can be displayed at the battery voltage low on the screen of the GOT To display the following message on system alarm set Battery alarm display to ON lt gt Basic Utility 2 2 1 Display setting functions System alarm 500 Warning Built in battery voltage is low Refer to the following for details of the system alarm display GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual Functions 10 ALARM GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 8 ALARM POINT Battery replacement timing When detecting voltage low replace the battery immediately Data can be saved for 14 days after the battery voltage low detection and cannot be saved after that LCF 3 4 Battery Specifications E Battery Replace battery periodically by referring to 3 4 Battery Specifications 1 Keep the GOT power supply on for 10 minutes or more and turn it off Executes step 1 to 6 within 5 minutes of powering the GOT power supply off 2 The battery is stored in the back of the GOT Replace the battery as shown in the following figure For GT1665 Remove the battery holder
166. he usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the graphic operation terminal device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the graphic operation terminal range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults the local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at our discretion In some of three cases however Mitsubishi Electric Corporation may consider the possibility of an application p
167. hort E Grounding examples 1 Independent grounding Best Power equipment servo etc Connection cable FG i LG Yo GOT FG LG Ground terminal block Panel Ground terminal grounding block Grounding for control system Grounding for power system For the control equipment ground the system at one end Especially for the control equipments communicating each other ground the system at one end 7 4 7 3 Grounding 2 Shared grounding Good Power equipment servo etc Connection cable m FG i LG lt Z O Z GOT FG z LG 3 SB Panel Panel E 5 roundin l 2 3 2 grounding ae Use a short and thick cable as much as possible 72 Ground the system at one end S To prevent noise from entering the GOT use a short and thick wire for grounding between the ground and the panel to ensure lower ground resistance S ma 3 Common grounding Not allowed D D Power equipment servo etc i Connection cable Q CN1A CN1B p Z FG s Ww CN2 CN3 LG S H 2 3 a FG r z k The power equipment and ra GOT aw control equipment are G connec
168. ht Sold separately Product name Model name Description Target GOT GT16 90XLTT For 15 high intensity wide angle view TFT XGA GT1695M x4 GT16 80SLTT For 12 1 high intensity wide angle view TFT SVGA GT1685M S 4 GT16 70SLTT For 10 4 high intensity wide angle view TFT SVGA GT1675M S 4 5 GT16 70VLTT GT1675M V2 z For 10 4 high intensity wide angle view TFT VGA GT16 70VLTTA GT16 70VLTN GT16 60SLTT GT16 60VLTT GT16 60VLTN GT1675M V GT1675 VN 4 GT1672 VN 4 GT1665M S 4 GT1665M V4 GT1662 VN4 Backlight For 10 4 TFT VGA For 8 4 high intensity wide angle view TFT SVGA For 8 4 high intensity wide angle view TFT VGA For 8 4 TFT VGA z Q He lt 5 9 ira zZ fo 8 SYSTEM 1 At GOT purchase it is installed in the main unit 2 Function version C or earlier 3 Function version D to G 4 Function version G or later z no E USB environmental protection cover Sold separately A UGE A A GT16 UCOV f GT1695 GT1685 GT1675 a Sees a Environmental cover for USB interface on the GOT GT1672 GT1665 GT1662 uw protection cover 1 main unit front side For complying IP67 GT16 50UCOV GT1655 1 At GOT purchase it is installed in the main body E Attachment Sold separately lt Description z 2 Product name Model name Model after z Applicable screen size Model b
169. i xisti i ing i istori i setting value error E y g 99 g 9 grap g the historical data list setting Check the logging ID in the historical trend graph setting 597 The specified logging ID does e When setting the logging enter an existing logging ID x not exist When setting the logging ID by using a device or the graph offset function specify the device for the logging ID set in the logging setting Configure the setting so that the number of logging devices set for the ae logging ID exceeds that of data lines on the historical trend graph The specified logging setting is 598 hcompatibie Configure the setting so that the data type of the logging device set for x i ible p the logging ID is the same as that of the device specified in the historical trend graph The version of OS installed in the GOT is not compatible with the printer 600 Unsupported version of printer unit x unit Install the extended function OS Printer with the latest GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 The printer unit is installed incorrectly The built in flash memory of the printer unit is broken or the guaranteed life has been elapsed i Check that the printer unit is installed correctly 601 Printer unit error i Ro x When the printer unit has been installed correctly the built in flash memory is broken or the guaranteed life has been elapsed Replace the printer unit with new one Check if the video RGB input unit is installed 602 Video RG
170. icating with a controller or connecting a personal computer Project data read write OS installation FA transparent function OVERVIEW RS 422 485 1ch Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800 bps Connector shape 14 pin female Application For communicating with a controller RS 422 485 5 Data transfer method 100BASE TX 10BASE T 1ch Connector shape RJ 45 modular jack Application For communicating with a controller using the gateway function or connecting a personal computer Project data read write FA transparent function MES interface function Ethernet CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Built in USB Full Speed 12Mbps Host 1ch interface Connector shape TYPE A Application For connecting a USB mouse keyboard USB memory data transfer data storage When formatting a USB memory to FAT16 Up to 2GB USB When formatting a USB memory to FAT32 Up to 32GB USB Full Speed 12Mbps Device 1ch Connector shape Mini B Application For connecting a personal computer Project data read write OS installation FA transparent function 7 z ie He prd 9 Ww Ww a 77 Compact flash slot 1ch Connector shape TYPE I Application Data transfer data storage GOT startup When formatting a CF card to FAT16 Up to 2GB When formatting a CF card to FAT32 Up to 32GB CF card Option function board For option function board mounting 1ch PART NAME AND SETTINGS
171. ight shutoff detection function is included Backlight i Backlight off screen saving time can be set Life 2 Approx 60 000 h or longer 13 Time when display luminance reaches 50 at the operating ambient temperature of 25 C Type Analog resistive film Key size Minimum 2 x 2 dots per key Touch panel Number of objects that can Simultaneous presses not allowed be simultaneously touched Only 1 point can be touched Life 8 1 million times or more operating force 0 98N max Detection length None Human Detection range None Sensor Detection delay time None Detection temperature None C drive Built in flash memory 15Mbytes for storing project Built in flash memory 11Mbytes for storing project data and OS data and OS Memory 3 Life Number of write times 100 000 times Built in clock precision 3 47 to 8 38sec day Operating ambient temperature of 25 C Battery GT15 BAT lithium battery Backup target Clock data maintenance time notification data system status log SRAM user area 500KB Life Approx 5 years Operating ambient temperature of 25 C Continued to next page 3 2 Performance Specifications Specifications Item GT1675M STBA GT1675M VTBA GT1675 VNBA GT1672 VNBA GT1675M STBD GT1675M VTBD GT1675 VNBD GT1672 VNBD RS 232 1ch Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800 bps RS 232 5 Connector shape D sub 9 pin Male Application For commun
172. igner2 Version Screen Design Manuall z x The number of objects using Sampling Cycle during ON Cycle during if Set trigger points too large a 304 N OFF exceeds 100 5 Decrease setting points Decrease the number of objects 306 No project data Download The project data is not downloaded or the screen data is not sufficient screen data Download the project data or screen data The monitor device of the object is not set 307 Monitor device not set Set the monitor device of the object H O 308 No comment data Download The comment file does not exist a comment Create the comment file and download to GOT m a 309 Device reading error Correct The error occurred when reading a continuous device a device Correct the device f Specified base screen window screen does not exist in the project data Project data does not exist or pa S 310 tof Specified base screen window screen is out of the permissible area out of range 9 Specify the existing base screen window screen No of alarm has exceeded The number of alarm histories that can be observed by the alarm history 311 upper limit Delete restored display function has exceeded the maximum points alarm Delete the restored history to decrease the number of alarm histories The collection frequency exceeded the upper limit when Store Memory No of sampling has exceeded and Accumulate Average were set in the scatter graph 312 upper limit Delete collec
173. igner3 Version1 19V CF card with 4GB 8GB and 16GB supported Jan 2011 SH NA 080928ENG D Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1 23Z e Error code list added Error message of duplicate IP address added Apr 2011 SH NA 080928ENG E Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1 28E e Compatible with GT1655 V e Error code list added e Description of fingerprint unit deleted Jul 2011 SH NA 080928ENG F Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1 31H e CC Link IE Field Network communication unit added e Protective sheet covered USB environmental protection cover type added e Error code list added Sep 2011 SH NA 080928ENG G e LCD change for the GT1675M V supported Backlight change in accordance with the LCD change for the GT1675M V supported Rating plate change supported Error code list added Feb 2012 SH NA 080928ENG H Replacement procedure of the backlight for the GT1675M V manufactured in February 2012 or later changed Apr 2012 SH NA 080928ENG I Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1 45X Description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed e JIS B 3502 specification change supported e Explanation of GOT mounting position corrected e Waterproof function of protective cover for oil deleted Jun 2012 SH NA 080928ENG J Description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed Nov 2012 SH NA 080928ENG K Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1 63R Corrective action for
174. ils refer to Section 5 4 2 W pz AT Ho ox gt A INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 5 3 EMC Directive Compliant System Configuration 5 12 5 4 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant Product Wire and connect GOT1000 series equipments as instructed below If the GOT1000 series equipments are configured in a way different from the following instructions the system may not comply with EMC directives 5 4 1 Power and ground wires wiring method 1 Power and ground wires wiring method Connect the power wire and connection cable as shown in the illustration and be sure to attach a ferrite core TDK Corporation type ZCAT3035 1330 within the range shown below Lead the power wire and ground wire as shown in 5 1 2 2 Make sure to ground the LG cable FG cable and functional ground cable a 100 240VAC GOT power section GOT power supply section INPUT 100 240VAC Hh Il L FS Co gt pu TCO b 24VDC GOT power section e For other than GT1655 90mm or less le U Ferrite core ZCAT3035 1330 GOT power supply section INPUT 24VDC SH L L G FG gt ke 90mm or less la Ferrite core ZCAT3035 1330 5 13 5
175. inen HOO Eimi mm S 5 17 16 15 5 4 3 Part Names and Settings of the GT1675 GT1672 No Name Description Lit in green Power is correctly supplied Lit in orange Screen saving 1 POWER LED Blinks in orange green Blown back light bulb Not lit Power is not supplied 2 Display screen Displays the Utility and the user creation screen 3 Touch key For operating the touch switches in the Utility and the user creation screen 4 USB interface Device For connecting a personal computer Connector type Mini B 5 USB interface Host For connecting a USB mouse keyboard data transfer and storage Connector type TYPE A 6 RS 232 interface For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer Connector type D sub 9 pin 7 Ethernet interface For communicating with a Controler or using the gateway function Connector type RJ 45 modular jack 8 RS 422 485 interface For
176. input signal 1 channel RGB output unit GT16M ROUT For analog RGB output signal 1 channel 6 For video input signal Multimedia unit GT16M MMR NTSC format PAL format compliant 1 channel F ti int Printer unit GT15 PRN A ads USB slave PictBridge 1 channel 1 channel GT15 DIO Positive Common Input Sink Type Output Ext I O unit For connecting an external I O device xterna umi ecard operation panel Negative Common Input Source Type Output Sound output unit GT15 SOUT For sound output For CF card installation CF card unit CF card unit GT15 CFCD B drive and CF card extension unit CF card extension GT15 CFEX For CF card installation unit CO8SET B drive GT15 RS2T4 9P RS 422 side connector 9 pins RS 422 conversion unit 23 RS 232 RS 422 conversion unit For how to install an option unit refer to the use s manual for the option unit used GT15 RS2T4 25P 14 GT1675 VN GT1672 VN GT1662 VN GT1655 V cannot be used 2 Set to ON by 5V supply at Communication settings of the utility 3 GT1655 V cannot be used CS Basic Utility 3 1 4 Communication setting operation The option unit can be installed on another extension unit lt 7 8 1 2 Installing multiple extension units in layers RGB unit and one video multimedia unit can be installed only in the first step in the enhancing interface Are the printer unit the external I O unit and the voice output unit the first steps in the enhancing interface One can
177. ion cable GT15 C07BS Cable length 0 7m GT15 C12BS Cable length 1 2m GT15 C30BS Cable length 3m GT15 C50BS Cable length 5m 2 2 Component List For connecting GOT and GOT Continued to next page Product name Model name Description GT15 C100BS Cable length 10m GOT to GOT long distance connection GT15 C200BS Cable length 20m For connecting GOT and GOT cable GT15 C300BS Cable length 30m AOJ2HCPU connection cable a gt x W gt For connecting AOJ2HCPU power supply module A0J2 PW and GOT GT15 J2C10B Cable length 1m Combined with GT15 CLBS can be used as GT15 Buffer circuit cable GT15 EXCNB Cable length 0 5m COEXSS 1 5 amp Z2 E Connection cables for MITSUBISHI PLCs Sold separately DZ gt ce Product name Model name Description al Q LCPU direct s 3 GT01 C30R2 6P Cable length 3m For connecting Q LCPU and GOT connection cable D Z FX communication i REGEA i O i For connecting FXCPU communication function T function extension j oO extension board D sub 9 pins connector iz board connection os A o oe FXCPU communication function adapter D sub 9 nm Q eee GT01 C30R2 9S Cable length 3m pins connector and GOT n FX communication S f For connecting personal computer Drawing function adapter software D sub 9 pins female and GOT D sub W su ins su RS 232 connection
178. ion unit Model X Unit mm inch 5 GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 z i y 58 2 28 GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 75ABUSL 5 Bus connection unit Zo GT15 QBUS GT15 QBUS2 79 3 11 BS idd GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBUS2L i a Sy 3 94 GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S Sia p Serial communication unit 3 57 2 24 GT15 RS4 TE Hole for ols inating GOT baal ls GT15 J71LP23 25 116 4 57 o View from MELSECNET H communication unit 6 the rear side So GT15 J71BR13 72 2 83 j Prohibited area 3 i i CC Link IE Controller Network for installation De ee GT15 J71GP23 SX 64 2 52 rs with CF card communication unit D interface A drive o CC Link IE Field Network o ben pent se a GT15 J71GF13 T2 50 1 97 Prohibited area for installation with an extension unit CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 31 1 22 Printer unit GT15 PRN 36 1 42 S lt CF card extension unit GT15 CFEX C08SET 104 4 09 4 cA zo External I O unit GT15 DIO GT15 DIOR 65 2 56 ZZ bE par 1 Prohibited areas for installing the control panel side installation unit with the extension unit a do not exist a W eye lt ZO Sou usa z o lt 4 a n z WIRING OPTION 6 3 Mounting Position 6 9 6 4 Control Panel Inside Temperature and Mounting Angle When mounting the GOT to a panel or similar set the display section as shown below When the temperature inside the control panel is 40 to 55 C or less the mounting angle should be in the range 60 to 105 degrees GOT Displ
179. isplay section 0 to 50 C z Operating ambient 5 temperature Other than the 0 to 55 C z display section 5 Z gt O Storage ambient temperature 20 to 60 C nO Operating ambient humidity 10 to 90 RH non condensing Storage ambient humidity 10 to 90 RH non condensing A 2 Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude Sweep count fe He Under 5 to 8 4Hz 3 5mm l s A P 10 times each in X TE Compliant with intermittent Y and Z directions o Vibration resistance JIS B3502 and vibration 8 4 to 150Hz 9 8m s wi 3 N ential Under 5 to 8 4Hz 1 75mm continuous vibration 8 4 to 150Hz 4 9m s2 7 a Shock resistance Compliant with JIS B3502 IEC 61131 2 147 m s2 3 times each in X Y and Z directions Operating atmosphere No greasy fumes corrosive gas flammable gas excessive conductive dust and direct sunlight Same as gt g storage atmosphere SS gE Operating altitude 2000 m 6562 ft max lt m Installation location Inside control panel Overvoltage category Il or less Pollution degree 2 or less O Cooli cooli a ooling method Self cooling ame ZOF Grounding Grounding with a resistance of 100Q or less ES D Soe 1 When mounting a multimedia unit GT16M MMR MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 or W gt Q CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 the operating ambient temperature must be reduced 5 C against the maximum values described in general specifications 2 Do not use
180. ists when creating files 524 Device writing error Correct When writing in the device error occurred x device Correct the device 525 Unable to read write alarm log Unable to read the alarm log file saved by the different project x files under different projects Confirm the alarm log file and where to store the alarm log file S The file specified for the file conversion does not exist 526 File conversion failed J X Check the settings for specifying a file to be converted 10 24 10 3 Error Message and System Alarm 10 3 Error Message and System Alarm Error s Channel No Error message Action code storage _ The capacity for the SRAM user area is insufficient 527 Insufficient SRAM capacity x Confirm the available memory in the SRAM user area 528 Error in SRAM The error may be caused by a failure in the GOT main unit x Failed to write data Contact your local Mitsubishi representative 529 Data error in SRAM Check the Error in SRAM data due to battery voltage low etc x battery life Confirm the battery status The channel of the specified monitor target does not exist or the channel Improper monitor device j 530 is not the monitor target x Confirm monitor channel Confirm the monitor target channel of the screen data 535 Cannot open image file Confirm whether any file exists in the CF card or USB memory X oo e Confirm whether image
181. ize 15MB 12 1 800 x 600 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors GT1685M STBA A i i video RGB multimedia compliant 100 to 240VAC Memory size 15MB GT1685M STBD aa 800 x 600 date TFT ca liquid crystal high Intensity wide angle view 65536 colors video RGB multimedia compliant 24VDC Memory size 15MB 10 4 800 x 600 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors GT1675M STBA i video RGB multimedia compliant 100 to 240VAC Memory size 15MB GT1675M STBD 10 4 800 x 990 gots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors video RGB multimedia compliant 24VDC Memory size 15MB 10 4 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors GT1675M VTBA i video RGB multimedia compliant 100 to 240VAC Memory size 15MB 10 4 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors GT1675M VTBD video RGB multimedia compliant 24VDC Memory size 15MB 10 4 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal 4096 colors GT1675 VNBA 100 to 240VAC Memory size 11MB 10 4 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal 4096 colors GOT GT1675 VNBD 24VDC Memory size 11MB GT1672 VNBA 10 4 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal 16 colors 100 to 240VAC Memory size 11MB GT1672 VNBD 10 4 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal 1
182. l Configuration 2 1 2 2 Component List 1 Explanation of the GOT model name GT16 5M i Power type A 100 to 240VAC D 24VDC Panel color type B Black Display device type T Zz Resolution TFT color High intensity Wide angle view TFT color Dedicated type Model type Screen size type 1024 x 768 XGA 800 x 600 SVGA 640 x 480 VGA Multimedia compliant Multimedia non compliant 65536 colors or 4096 colors 1 16 colors 15 212 1 10 4 8 4 15 7 aanvoolyallg el oax O GOT1000 series GT16 GT15 GT11 GT10 1 refer to the following for 65536 color GOT L gt 3 2 Performance Specifications 2 Explanation of the option model name GT K kkk None Common for all types 90 80 75 70 60 50 16M 16 15 11 09 05 01 2 2 Component List Dedicated for 15 Dedicated for 12 1 Common for 15 12 1 Dedicated for 10 4 Dedicated for 8 4 Dedicated for 5 7 Multimedia compliant model Dedicated for 16 Common for GT16 GT 15 Partially dedicated for GT15 Dedicated for GT11 Partially common for GT16 GT15 GT11 Common for GT16 GT15 GT 11 For third party PLC side T Solderless terminal C Preparatory soldering 3 Third party PLC connection cable GTO9 C kx KK KK N Connector pin type of the P Plug male connection target S Socket female Number of connector pins Indicates the
183. l code Manual Name Packaging Stored in CD ROM SH 080528ENG GT15 User s Manual 1D7M23 E GT14 manuals Manual Number Model code Manual Name Packaging Stored in CD ROM JY997D44801 GT14 User s Manual 09R823 E GT12 manuals Manual Number Manual Name Packaging Model code Stored in CD ROM SH 080977ENG GT12 User s Manual 1D7ME1 E GT11 manuals Manual Number Manual Name Packaging Model code JY997D17501 GT11 User s Manual Stored in CD ROM 09R815 JY997D20101 GT11 Handy GOT User s Manual Stored in CD ROM JY997D20102 09R817 E GT10 manuals Manual Number Model code Manual Name Packaging Stored in CD ROM JY997D24701 GT10 User s Manual 09R819 QUICK REFERENCE E Creating a project Obtaining the specifications and operation methods of GT Designer3 Setting available functions on GT Designer3 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 1 2 2 2 Creating a screen displayed on the GOT Eu Obtaining useful functions to increase efficiency of drawing Setting details for figures and objects GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions Setting functions for the data collection or trigger action 1 2 2 2 Setting functions to use peripheral devices Simulating a created project on a personal computer GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3
184. l for GT Designer2 GT Works2 3 This value differs depending on the cable used If the bending radius of the cable used is greater than the value specified above apply the value of the cable used 4 GT1675 V GT1672 V GT1662 V GT1655 V cannot be used 5 Dimension when no battery is used If a battery is used the dimension when a CF card is used is required E For installing CF card extension unit 1 Installing location a Depth dimensions When the control panel side installation unit is installed on the control panel 180mm in depth including the bending radius of the cable is required inside the control panel 180 or more 7 09 Unit mm inch b Available area for installation When the control panel side installation unit is installed on the control panel a distance of 25mm is required around the unit Keep a distance of 25mm or more between the control panel side installation unit and the GOT The control panel side installation unit can be installed in the area shown in the following figure For the installation do not give stresses including an incorrect bending radius of the cable on the connection cable lt Appendix1 External Dimensions A a D Alo als gjg n 25 or less 0 98 i z o lt q n z SS 10 GZ 500 or less 19 69 500 or less 19 69 Prohibited area for installation Available area for
185. lay is not updated and any operation is not allowed Proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation APPENDICES O Other faulty displays O The screen freezes Proceed to 1 e e Buzzer sound O Does not sound Buzzer sound Proceed to 2 Status of the GOT when it freezes O Continues to beep randomly Example The rhythm as three beeps one beep and then two beeps is repeated O Continues to beep in a particular pattern Check the setting of the read device When the Buzzer output signal has no error proceed to 2 Status of the GOT when it freezes The read device of the system information may have turned ON when the device was set turning ON the Buzzer output signal O Beeps continuously 10 1 GOT Restoration Sheet 10 3 2 Status of the GOT when it freezes screen operation stopped Phenomenon Cause status a Switching to the utility Action Error code system alarm O Enabled Example 460 Communication unit error When the system alarm display function can be used take the action for the error code system alarm displayed If the action cannot be taken proceed to 2 b The system alarm display function cannot be O Disabled used Proceed to 2 c b Executing of I O check from the GOT utility Display details O Communication error Example A message indicating the cause may be a connection er
186. le to be used 7 Depth dimensions for installing multiple stages r Q The following shows how to calculate the depth dimensions for installing multiple stages to the GOT When installing only the first stage refer to the dimensions in App 1 6 W 22 go Select the GOT main unit coefficient from the following list a5 bw GOT side face 26 2zZ 100 3 94 or more G main unit 0 GOT type z oF coefficient 5 fe GT1695 2 0 08 5 W GT1685 3 5 0 14 a GT1675 2 __ 0 5 0 02 B GT1672 VY GT1665 Es GT1662 1 5 0 06 F Other equipment GT1655 a S Unit mm inch z a a 2 Select the option coefficient of the corresponding extension unit from the following list 3 H opti Model name option coefficient GT15 CFCD GT15 CFEX CO8SET 20 5 0 81 GT16M V4 1 GT16M R2 GT16M V4R1 t GT16M ROUT GT15 QBUS GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S GT15 RS4 TE GT15 J71LP23 25 21 5 0 85 GT15 J71BR13 GT15 J61BT13 GT15 PRN GT15 DlO GT15 DIOR GT15 SOUT GT16M MMR GT15 J71GP23 SX GT15 J71GF13 T2 35 5 1 40 Unit mm inch 1 When installing GT16M V4 GT16M R2 GT16M V4R1 GT16M ROUT or GT16M MMR and GT15 J71GP23 SX or GT15 J71GF13 T2 install GT15 J71GP23 SX or GT15 J71GF13 T2 in the second stage 3 Substitute the coefficients selected in step 1 and Step 2 to the following formula E for 2 stages G
187. lectric shock product damage or malfunctions CAUTION Make sure to ground the FG terminal LG terminal and functional ground terminal of the GOT power supply section with a ground resistance of 1000 or less solely for the GOT Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction When tightening the terminal screws use a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 Terminal screws which are not to be used must be tightened always at torque 0 5 to 0 8 N m Otherwise there will be a danger of short circuit against the solderless terminals Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them with the specified torque If any solderless spade terminal is used it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose resulting in failure Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the product Not doing so can cause a fire or failure WIRING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range 0 5 to 0 8 N m Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT Not doing so can cause a fire failure or malfunction The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter such as wire offcuts
188. ling center The following symbol is printed on the batteries and packaging of batteries and devices with built in batteries used for Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal GOT Symbol This symbol is for EU member states only The symbol is specified in the new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC Article 20 Information for end users and Annex II The symbol indicates that batteries need to be disposed of separately from other wastes 2 Exportation precautions The new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC requires the follwoing when marketing or exporting batteries and or devices with built in batteries to EU member states e To print the symbol on batteries devices or their packaging e To explain the symbol in the manuals of the products a b Labelling To market or export batteries and or devices with built in batteries which have no symbol to EU member states on September 26 2008 or later print the symbol shown in 1 on the GOT or their packaging Explaining the symbol in the manuals To export devices incorporating Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal to EU member states on September 26 2008 or later provide the latest manuals that include the explanation of the symbol If no Mitsubishi manuals or any old manuals without the explanation of the symbol are provided separately attach an explanatory note regarding the symbol to each manual of the devices uly Hor The requirements apply to batteries and or devices with
189. med by the utility and system alarm Refer to the following for details of the battery status display by the utility Basic Utility 2 1 1 Time setting By using system alarm the message that notifies the battery voltage has decreased can be displayed at the battery voltage low on the screen of the GOT To display the following message on system alarm set Battery alarm display to ON gt gt Basic Utility 2 2 1 Display setting functions System alarm 500 Warning Built in battery voltage is low Refer to the following for details of the system alarm display C gt gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions 11 ALARM GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 8 ALARM Battery replacement timing When detecting voltage low replace the battery immediately Data can be saved for 14 days after the battery voltage low detection and cannot be saved after that C3 3 4 Battery Specifications 9 4 9 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement E Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States This section describes the precautions for disposing of waste batteries in EU member states and exporting batteries and or devices with built in batteries to EU member states 1 Disposal precautions In EU member states there is a separate collection system for waste batteries Dispose of batteries properly at the local community waste collection recyc
190. memory 15Mbytes for storing project data and OS Memory i i L ry Life Number of write 100 000 times gt times i Built in clock precision 3 47 to 8 38sec day Operating ambiant temperature of 25 C Battery GT15 BAT lithium battery Backup target Clock data maintenance time notification data system status log SRAM user area 500KB Life Approx 5 years Operating ambiant temperature of 25 C z RS 232 1ch z Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800 bps u L RS 232 5 Connector shape D sub 9 pin Male 2 Application For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer Project data read DE write OS installation FA transparent function RS 422 485 1ch Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800 bps Connector shape 14 pin female Application For communicating with a controller RS 422 485 5 Data transfer method 100BASE TX 10BASE T 6 1ch Connector shape RJ 45 modular jack Application For communicating with a controller using the gateway function or connecting a personal computer Project data read write FA transparent function MES interface function N z Qo Ee prd 9 uw O Ww o Ca Ethernet Built in USB Full Speed 12Mbps Host 1ch interface Connector shape TYPE A Application For connecting a USB mouse keyboard USB memory data transfer data storage When formatting a USB memory to FAT16 Up to 2GB USB
191. n former Yamatake Corporation OMRON Abbreviation of OMRON Corporation KEYENCE Abbreviation of KEYENCE CORPORATION KOYO El Abbreviation of KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO LTD SHARP Abbreviation of Sharp Manufacturing Systems Corporation JTEKT Abbreviation of JTEKT Corporation SHINKO Abbreviation of Shinko Technos Co Ltd CHINO Abbreviation of CHINO CORPORATION TOSHIBA Abbreviation of TOSHIBA CORPORATION TOSHIBA MACHINE Abbreviation of TOSHIBA MACHINE CO LTD HITACHI IES Abbreviation of Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd HITACHI Abbreviation of Hitachi Ltd FUJI Abbreviation of FUJI ELECTRIC CO LTD PANASONIC Abbreviation of Panasonic Corporation PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX Abbreviation of Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co Ltd YASKAWA Abbreviation of YASKAWA Electric Corporation YOKOGAWA Abbreviation of Yokogawa Electric Corporation ALLEN BRADLEY Abbreviation of Allen Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation Inc GE Abbreviation of GE Intelligent Platforms LS IS Abbreviation of LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd SCHNEIDER Abbreviation of Schneider Electric SA SICK Abbreviation of SICK AG SIEMENS Abbreviation of Siemens AG RKC Abbreviation of RKC INSTRUMENT INC HIRATA Abbreviation of Hirata Corporation MURATEC Abbreviation of Muratec products manufactured by Muratec Automation Co Ltd PLC Abbreviation of programmable controller Temperature controller Generic term for temperature
192. n the Communication Setting Too many same units are Units are mounted on the GOT exceeding the maximum number of a 482 mounted Confirm the no of mountable units O units Check the number of units and remove unnecessary units 10 22 10 3 Error Message and System Alarm Error Channel No Error message Action code storage a Zz Two or more units which cannot be mounted on the GOT simultaneously 5 s Simultaneous mounting of the 1 483 i are mounted Z units are not allowed f O a2 Check the mounted units and remove unnecessary units af ji Zz 484 Unit mounted incorrectly Move The unit is not mounted on the GOT in the correct position i oD the unit to correct position Confirm the mounting position of the unit O Units are mounted on the GOT exceeding the maximum number of A o Too many units mounted on 1 2 485 i mountable units GOT Reduce units f O 5 Check the number of units and remove unnecessary units 9 The communication driver set in the Communication Setting and the id hes communication unit installed on the GOT do not match S Communication unit not ha A re F O Check whether the communication driver set in the Communication 1 486 corresponded to set ae ae i Setting is correct O communication driver A Check whether any incorrect communication unit has been installed on the GOT Please turn on the PLC and the F n 48
193. nel Inside Dimensions for Mounting GOT 6 1 6 2 Panel Cutting Dimensions 1 Panel cutting dimensions when installing GOT Make an installation hole on the control panel with the dimensions shown below Make space of 10mm above and below the hole respectively for the installation fittings A Panel thickness 2 to 4 mm or less GOT A mn inch B mn inch 383 5 15 10 282 5 11 12 i lepoMx 2 0 08 0 0 2 0 08 0 0 302 11 89 228 8 98 GTibgaM s 2 0 08 0 0 2 0 08 0 0 GT1675M S GT1675M V 289 11 38 200 7 87 m GT1675 VN 2 0 08 0 0 2 0 08 0 0 GT1672 VN sleepy 227 8 94 176 6 93 GT1662 yn 2 0 08 0 0 2 0 08 0 0 153 6 02 121 4 76 STIGSS V 2 0 08 0 0 2 0 08 0 0 2 Panel cutting dimensions when installing CF card extension unit Make an installation hole on the control panel with the dimensions shown below Make space of 10mm on the left and right of the hole respectively for the installation fittings Panel thickness 2 to 4 mm or less GOT B mn inch GT15 CFEX CO8SET A mm inch 94 3 70 2 0 08 0 0 33 1 30 2 0 08 0 0 Precautions before executing the panel cut If the GOT is installed on the panel remove the GOT from the panel temporarily 6 2 6 2 Panel Cutting Dimensions 6 3 Mounting Position E For installing GOT When mounting the GOT the following clearances must be left from the othe
194. neous presses not allowed simultaneously touched Only 1 point can be touched Life 8 1 million times or more operating force 0 98N max Detection length None Human Detection range None Sensor Detection delay time None Detection temperature None C drive Built in flash memory 15Mbytes for storing project data and OS Memory Life Number of write times 100 000 times Built in clock precision 3 61 to 2 16sec day Operating ambient temperature of 25 C Battery GT11 50BAT lithium battery Backup target Clock data maintenance time notification data system status log SRAM user area 500KB Life Approx 5 years Operating ambient temperature of 25 C Continued to next page 3 14 3 2 Performance Specifications Specifications Item GT1655 VTBD RS 232 1ch Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800 bps Ss RS 232 5 Connector shape D sub 9 pin Male Fe Application For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer Project data read 3 write OS installation FA transparent function RS 422 485 1ch n Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800 bps RS 422 485 5 i zZ Connector shape 14 pin female fe ae ee F E Application For communicating with a controller Data transfer method 100BASE TX 10BASE T 1ch a oO Ethernet Connector shape RJ 45 modular jack 5 5 Application For
195. nfirming of Versions and Conformed Standards To use a stylus pen the following specifications must be met e Material polyacetal resin Tip radius 0 8mm or more If the operating ambient temperature is other than 25 C the error may become large When using a stylus pen it will be 100 000 times or more operating force 0 98N max Since the touch panel is a consumable product structurally it may not be used even fewer than above depending on the using method and usage environment A USB memory and a CF card that store more than 2GB are available for the GT16 with the following versions of OSs installed BootOS version 05 09 00AF or later e Standard monitor OS version 05 09 00 or later With OSs earlier than the above versions the GOT cannot correctly recognize the USB memory and the CF card that store more than 2GB If the above versions of OSs are not installed install the OSs on the GOT by using GT Designer3 with version 1 17T or later GT Designer2 version is not compatible with a USB memory and a CF card that store more than 2GB For function version G or earlier refer to the following Display angle of the display section Left Right 75 degrees Top 50 degrees Bottom 60 degrees Backlight Cold cathode fluorescent tube replaceable Backlight life Approx 50 000 h or more 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 2 2 GT1685M S Item GT1685M STBA GT1685M STBD Specifications Type TFT color liquid cryst
196. nit operates correctly after transportation INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal Before using the equipment please read this manual carefully to use the equipment to its optimum CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 00 ccccccccccccsceeceeeecnnneeeeeccseeeeeessaeeeeeeecaeeeeeescaeeeeescaaeeeeeeseaeeeeesssaeeeeesseeeeeseea A 1 INTRODUCTION sidsccecveeadecievditascdevvaiadedcaviudaciceuvanadaydsveuddeadasvaundasticvanedatdatvagedsledvialdesndevauadaviavddaacecnvaadsiedeis A 9 CONTENT erred a a E E N N ceetnavact ce E A A 9 ABOUT MANUALS ercran E EE E AAE A 13 QUICK REFERENCE 00ssccdcccccssscccacesseeedetevvscteccaeestsecedanessncedeeesdenscadedesseseatdedensecaeesseneddaetssuncectedecccteeteaes A 16 ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS cccccccccccsseeceeeesceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeseaeeeeeeeseeeeseseseeeeeeenaes A 18 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL iiscsccts sivecieenrartinectecils T T O ded eta A 23 PACKING EIS Tiaa aaa AE E EE REAA EEEE RAEE AEA auaveian ures A 24 OVERVIEW I Features ciega a a a cucdeeavaaaaddddgessaeadeieanadiaaciaetne tedersa 1 2 1 2 Rough Pre operation Procedure ccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeaeeeeseeeneeeeseeiaeeeeeseenaas 1 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1 Overall ComfiQuration sia facing ccaceeis Speci eoecee date eA ee pee eee el 2 1 2 2 Component List ccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeceeeee eee eaeaaaeaaanaaeeee
197. nnect the ground cable For other than GT1655 For GT1655 Connect the ground cable of the connection cable with the GOT s Connect the ground cable of the connection cable to the functional ground cable to the FG terminal of the GOT s power ground terminal and connect the ground cable of GOT to the FG For connecting the ground cables each flat side of the two solderless terminal of the GOT power supply terminals must be faced Functional grounding FG 24G 24V Ground cable of connection cable Ground cable of GO Terminal Solderless screw terminal fo T Shorting bar For the ground cable of the connection cable use the following solderless terminals Applicable solderless terminal RAV1 25 3 V1 25 B3A FV1 25 B3A For grounding the GOT refer to the following LF 7 2 Wiring to GOT Power Section 7 12 7 6 Grounding Extension Units 8 OPTION When GT16 is used with a communication unit or option unit monitoring is not possible because the GOT cannot recognize the unit using the standard monitor OS and communication driver of the version before GT Designer3 Version 1 00A or GT Designer2 Version 2 87R 8 1 Communication Unit The communication unit is used to relate the GOT extension interfaces to the system at the connection destination To connect the communication unit make Communication Settings for communications with a PLC For details of connection refer to the following manual lt GOT10
198. nput unit Version B or later Jan 2009 GT16M R2 5 Version E or later Oct 2009 Version B or later Jan 2009 Video RGB input unit GT16M V4R1 7 Version E or later Oct 2009 2 RGB output unit GT16M ROUT Version B or later Jan 2009 Version B or later Jan 2009 Multimedia unit GT16M MMR F Version E or later Oct 2009 2 Printer unit 1 GT15 PRN Version B or later Feb 2006 CF card unit GT15 CFCD Version C or later Jul 2007 CF card extension unit GT15 CFEX CO8SET Version B or later Jul 2007 GT15 DIO Version B or later May 2007 External I O unit GT15 DIOR Version A or later Jul 2008 Sound output unit GT15 SOUT Version B or later May 2007 4 2 For the printer to be connected configure the system in accordance with the EMC Directive specifications for the printer as requested by the printer manufacturer To comply with the EMC Directive use the hardware version of an option unit shown above or later when the option unit is mounted on the GT1695 GT1675 or GT1665 When the hardware version of an option unit is earlier than the version shown above the GOT does not comply with the EMC Directive 5 3 5 When the option is used To meet the EMC Directive use the following option When an option other than below is used it does not meet the EMC Directive 5 11 Hardware version of option Product name Model penne Production year and m
199. nt Visual check Remove clean sticking Refer to the following for the model names of the protection sheet or the replacement procedure lt gt 8 3 2 mProtective sheet 9 2 Periodic Inspection E Yearly or half yearly inspection items The following inspection should also be performed when equipment has been moved or modified or the wiring changed No Inspection Item Inspection Method Criterion Action Ambient Display section 0 to 40 C temperature Make measurement with Other portions 0 to 55 C For use in control panel Surrounding thermometer or eles 1 Ambient temperature inside control environment hygrometer 10 to 90 RH i humidity panel is ambient temperature Measure corrosive gas Atmosphere No corrosive gas GOT with 100 to 240VAC Power supply 100 240V AC Measure voltage across 85 to 242VAC Change supply power voltage check 5 power terminals Input polarity 24VDC GOT with Left _ of 24VDC Measure voltage across Change wiring 24VDC power Right power terminals Looseness Move module Should be mounted firmly Retighten screws Mounting 3 Dirt foreign A i a status Visual check No dirt foreign matter sticking Remove clean matter Loose terminal Retighten screws with n Not loose Retighten terminal screws screws screwdriver Proximate Connection 4 solderless Visual check Proper intervals Correct status terminals Loose p Retighten
200. nt hole on the lower part of the GOT E T TFS Hole for backlight replacement 9 When pulling out the backlight with pushing it toward the center of the GOT the projection of the rubber holder is unfixed and the backlight can be easily pulled out Expanded figure of part B in step 7 A jut of the rubber holder 70 install a new backlight in the reverse procedure of removal When inserting a new backlight into the backlight replacement hole of the GOT make sure not to damage the sheaths of the cables Insert the backlight until the projection of the rubber holder is fixed Assemble the case in the reverse procedure of disassembly Tighten the fixing screws on the GOT rear face with a torque of 0 36 to 0 48Nem When installing the case make sure that the cables are not stuck between the case and the GOT 9 6 Backlight Replacement E For GT16 80SLTT GT16 70SLTT and GT16 70VLTT I 2 Turn off the GOT Disconnect the power supply cable and the communication cable Remove the GOT from the control panel Remove the right extension unit cover of the GOT Remove an extension unit including a bus connection unit if it is mounted iver Remove the cable connector of the backlight from the connector of the GOT board Expanded figure of part A in step 4 When replacing the GT16 70SLTT VLTT remove the cables from the cable holder When replacing the GT16 70SLTT VLTT
201. nterface is included as standard The RS 422 485 interface is included as standard The CF card interface is included as standard e The Ethernet interface is included as standard e Font installation is available to increase the system fonts e Combined use of 4 types of alarms system alarm user alarm alarm history alarm popup display realizes more efficient alarm notification e Maintenance timing report function is available that measures the backlight energization time and notifies of maintenance time e The USB interface is positioned on the GOT front This enables the system startup to be performed more efficiently using FA device startup tool and eliminates the necessity of indirect works opening and closing the control panel cable replacement cable rewiring in order to improve the working efficiency The blown backlight bulb can be confirmed even during screen saving with the blinked POWER LED at backlight shutoff detection Enhanced support of FA device setup tools e Transferring and monitoring sequence programs with the personal computer connected to the GOT can be executed when connecting to a PLC CPU with the direct CPU connection or bus connection FA transparent function 1 1 Features 1 2 Rough Pre operation Procedure The outline procedure before operating GOT is shown Start i Install GT Works3 or GT Designer2 in the PC Create project data Wire for the GOT power su
202. nual GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used To use a stylus pen the following specifications must be met e Material polyacetal resin e Tip radius 0 8mm or more If the operating ambient temperature is other than 25 C the error may become large When using a stylus pen it will be 100 000 times or more operating force 0 98N max Since the touch panel is a consumable product structurally it may not be used even fewer than above depending on the using method and usage environment A USB memory and a CF card that store more than 2GB are available for the GT16 with the following versions of OSs installed BootOS version 05 09 00AF or later e Standard monitor OS version 05 09 00 or later With OSs earlier than the above versions the GOT cannot correctly recognize the USB memory and the CF card that store more than 2GB If the above versions of OSs are not installed install the OSs on the GOT by using GT Designer3 with version 1 17T or later GT Designer2 version is not compatible with a USB memory and a CF card that store more than 2GB 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 3 Power Supply Specifications The following describes the power supply specifications for the GT16 W 3 3 1 For GOTs powered from the 100 to 240VAC power supply z Wu 3 3 2 For GOTs powered from the 24VDC power supply 3 lt 7 Hinr O Operation at momentary failure ce e If an instantaneous power failure occ
203. o GOT Measure for the cables installed Ic ys together ot Power for the power equipment Separating the FG cable and power line of the GOT in wiring reduces the influence of noise 4 Surge measures Current status A surge suppressor is used for the wiring of the load such as MCCB electromagnetic contactor relay solenoid valve or induction motor When a surge suppressor is used fill out the entry area below with the surge suppressor model name and the name of the equipment for which the surge suppressor is used O Effective O Ineffective O Used O Not used PLC Measure for the equipment without a surge suppressor used The surge suppressor must be attached close to the load Attaching the surge suppressor on the cable close to the load can reduce the influence of surge on the GOT Entry area O Effective O Ineffective Model name of the surge suppressor Equipment name 10 1 GOT Restoration Sheet 10 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 2 e e x N WW a a 2 fe APPENDICES 5 Grounding status 10 8 10 1 GOT Restoration Sheet Connection cable The FG cables of the control c i equipment
204. o so may corrupt data within the CF card When removing a CF card from the GOT make sure to support the CF card by hand as it may pop out Failure to do so may cause the CF card to drop from the GOT and break MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION When installing a USB memory to the GOT make sure to install the USB memory to the USB interface firmly Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to poor contact Before removing the USB memory from the GOT operate the utility screen for removal After the successful completion dialog box is displayed remove the memory by hand carefully Failure to do so may cause the USB memory to drop resulting in a damage or failure of the memory For closing the USB environmental protection cover fix the cover by pushing the A mark on the latch firmly to comply with the protective structure Remove the protective film of the GOT When the user continues using the GOT with the protective film the film may not be removed Operate and store the GOT in environments without direct sunlight high temperature dust humidity and vibrations When using the GOT in the environment of oil or chemicals use the protective cover for oil Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunction due to the oil or chemical entering into the GOT WIRING PRECAUTIONS N WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring Failure to do so may result in an e
205. of CF card extension unit connection cable The following explains wiring the FG cable when the CF card extension unit is installed on the GOT 1 Cables to be connected to CF card extension unit Do not install the connection cable together with the main circuit lines high voltage large current and I O signal lines 2 GOT terminal block The terminal block layout of a GOT differs depending on the model Before wiring check the terminal layout of the GOT to be used 3 Ground cables Up to two ground cables can be connected to the LG and FG terminals of the GOT respectively For three or more ground cables connect the third or later ground cables to the LG terminal 7 6 Grounding Extension Units 7 11 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION OPTION When the CF card extension unit is used ground the ground cable as shown below For other than GT1655 For GT1655 GOT GT15 CFEXIF GOT GT15 CFEXIF i J T Functional grounding L N cre Fo 246 jr2av 8 N an GT15 CO8CF 2 GT15 CO8CF 7 Make the connections as shown below For other than GT1655 For GT1655 Install the shorting bar to the LG and FG terminals of the GOT s The shorting bar is not required power Functional grounding FG 24G 24V 2 Co
206. of the cover to the POWER LED on the GOT front face and the direction of the cover is decided GOT POWER LED POWER LED frame Protective cover for oil 2 One corner of the cover is pulled outside and it hangs it on the corner of the front panel of GOT Please do not pull the oil cover more than the necessity and do not bend it extremely The seat part and the rubber part in the display part might flake off Protective cover for oil The corner is hung 3 The oil cover was hung and the edge of the oil cover is sequentially obtained and obtain the oil cover to cover rubber packing parts in the back of GOT of the front panel It is the order of the arrow from A side to D side The corner on the left is hung and the oil cover is hung from A side to D side on the starting point sequentially z O a e 8 3 Option 8 17 8 18 Before mounting the GOT onto the control panel Please confirm all surroundings Whether the rubber packing part is surely covered to prevent going into such as the liquids in the board fS Make sure that corners of protective cover for oil match those of GOT front Mount the GOT onto the control panel When the control panel is dirty clean the control panel The panel cutting dimensions and mounting screw tightening torque with the protective cover for oil are the same as those without the cover For how to mount the GOT onto the control panel refer to the following L gt
207. of the terminating resistor for the RS 422 485 communication port inside the cover 17 Optional function board interface For installing the optional function board Hardware reset switch 18 Reset switch CSch SWIG Inoperative in the bus connection or with the bus connection unit installed 19 Hole for unit installation fitting Hole for inserting the unit installation fitting EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 20 Battery holder Houses the battery 21 Installation switch Used for OS installations at the GOT startup 1 There is no interface in GT1662 VN wk Hr Connector used for the RS 232 interface The specification of the connector used for the RS 232 interface of GT1665 and GT1662 is as follows Manufacturer DDK Ltd Model name 17LE 23090 27 D4CK or equivalent product Connector used for the RS 422 485 interface The specification of the connector used for the RS 422 485 interface of GT1665 and GT1662 is as follows Manufacturer Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co Ltd Model name HDR EC14LFDT1 SLE or equivalent product INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 4 4 Part Names and Settings of the GT1665 GT1662 4 8 4 5 Part Names and Settings of the GT1655 d_b
208. on Specifications subject to change without notice Printed in Japan January 2014
209. on which may cause a touch switch to operate Note that the following occurs on the GOT when the backlight goes out e GT1655 V The POWER LED blinks green orange and the monitor screen appears blank e Models other than GT1655 V The POWER LED blinks green orange and the monitor screen appears dimmed The display section of the GT16 is an analog resistive type touch panel If you touch the display section simultaneously in 2 points or more the switch that is located around the center of the touched point if any may operate Do not touch the display section in 2 points or more simultaneously Doing so may cause an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction When programs or parameters of the controller such as a PLC that is monitored by the GOT are changed be sure to reset the GOT or shut off the power of the GOT at the same time Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction CAUTION Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main circuit power or other wiring Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm 3 94in apart Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section When the GOT is connected to the Ethernet network the available IP address is restricted according to the system configuration When m
210. on regarding the method of specifying the error part Please refer to User s Manual of used PLC CPU for details related to the PLC CPU error and special register 10 12 1 How to locate error positions a Use of peripheral devices Using the peripheral devices such as GX Developer check what type of the error occurs on the PLC CPU and based on the error message on the PLC CPU check each module and cable for installation and earthing statuses b Error timing Check the timing of errors 1 2 3 An error occurs when the power is turned on or immediately after the PLC is reset The error may be detected by the initial processing of the PLC CPU In this case because the faulty module may not be identified use only an END instruction for the sequence program and remove the modules one by one until the error does not occur When the error is eliminated after a specific module has been removed the module may be causing the error An error occurs after a specific operation or several seconds The error may occur in the sequence program Check the error step where the error may occur and the sequence program in that step The sequence program can be diagnosed throughout by merely using an END instruction for the sequence program An error occurs when a specific device operates The mis operation may be caused by noise Check that any signal line such as bus cable is not laid out too close to the operating devic
211. on version G or earlier refer to the following Display angle of the display section Left Right 45 degrees Top 20 degrees Bottom 20 degrees Backlight life Approx 40 000 h or more 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 13 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM N z ie He prd 9 Le O Ww o Ca PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 3 2 5 GT1655 V Specifications Item GT1655 VTBD Type TFT color liquid crystal display High intensity and wide angle view Screen size 5 7 Resolution 640 x 480 dots Display size 115 4 53 W x 86 3 39 H mm inch 16 dot standard font 40 characters x 30 lines 2byte character i Display character Display ey 12 dot standard font 53 characters x 40 lines 2byte character section Display color 65536 colors Display angle Top Bottom Left Right 80 degrees Intensity of LCD only 350 cd m Intensity adjustment 8 level adjustment Life Approx 50 000 h Operating ambient temperature 25 C Backlight LED irreplaceable backlight shutoff detection function is included g Backlight off screen saving time can be set Life 2 Approx 70 000 h or longer ue Time when display luminance reaches 50 at the operating ambient temperature of 25 C Type Analog resistive film Key size Minimum 2 x 2 dots per key Touch panel Number of objects that can be Simulta
212. onnection terminal block type MELSECNET H GT15 J71LP23 25 Optical double loop unit communication unit GT15 J71BR13 Coaxial bus unit CC Link IE Controller Network ine wom er NeiworK 1GT15 J71GP23 SX Optical loop unit communication unit CC Link IE Field Network sea E GT15 J71GF13 T2 __ intelligent device station unit communication unit Pere Intelligent device station unit CC Link ti t GT15 J61BT13 a ae CC LINK Ver 2 compliant mi multi drop connection era Rea GOT multidrop connection unit For how to install a communication unit refer to the use s manual for the communication unit used The communication unit can be installed on another extension unit CF 8 1 2 Installing multiple extension units in layers 8 1 Communication Unit 8 1 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION es WIRING z O a e 8 1 2 Installing multiple extension units in layers This section describes how to install another extension units on the extension units that has been installed on the GOT ip Remove the connector cover and sticker from the installed extension units Connector cover Sticker 2 3 After installing the unit fasten it by tightening the mounting screws 2 places with tightening torque of 0 36 to 0 48N m 4 When installing another extension unit on the unit that has been installed implement the above operations of
213. onth Option function board GT16 MESB Version B or later Jan 2009 5 3 EMC Directive Compliant System Configuration 5 3 6 Cables 1 Cables used a For the MELSECNET H connection coaxial cable and video connection use double shield coaxial cables it The 5C 2V connector plug is applicable to double shielded coaxial cable fz Connect the 5C 2V connector plug to the coaxial cable inside a double shielded coaxial cable z Ground the shielded part outside a double shielded coaxial cable as shown in the following figure Zz Double shielded coaxial cable Enlarged view aus Sheath amp Mitsubishi Cable 5C 2V CCY of cable ga g rd i 26 Internal ane conducter Grounding Insulation External External material conductor conductor 7 Grounding 4 T b For the CC Link IE Field Network connection use the following cable dedicated to the CC Link IE Field 2 Network G Q Manufacturer Model name 2 Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd SC E5EW SOM c For details of the cables used for conncetions other than the above refer to the following manual a Zz lt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used y N GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2 GT Works2 S bE or 2 Adjusting a cable for the EMC Directive compliance o Modify the cables including user produced cable to ensure compliance with the EMC Directive For deta
214. ontrollers as a PLC manufactured by other company create the cable by the user and se Hin configure the system to meet the EMC Directive specifications for the connected device an KE 9 PLC manufactured by other company microcomputer temperature controller inverter servo amplifier CNC MODBUS R RTU or MODBUS R TCP connection Connected devices If connecting to the PLC or microcomputer other than Mitsubishi products MELSEC Q series MELSEC L series MELSEC QnA series or MELSEC A series please refer to the EMC Directive compliance manual for that specific device W ne lt 6 are ox gt a INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 5 3 EMC Directive Compliant System Configuration 5 8 5 3 3 When the communication unit is used Use the following communication unit with the GOT to ensure compliance with the EMC Directive The GOT does not comply with the EMC Directive when connected with other than followings Connection method Bus connection Communication unit used Hardware version of the communication unit Production year and month Version D or later GT15 QBUS Oct 2005 GT15 QBUS2 Version C or later GT15 ABUS Oct 2005 GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L Version G or later Mar 2005 Direct connection to CPU GOT RS 232 interface GOT RS 422 485 interface GT15 RS2T4 9P Version A or later GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S V
215. onversion RS 422 485 connector RS 485 terminal block converter module with dedicated connection cable FA LTBGTR4CBL10 OVERVIEW Cable length 1 0m modules with cable FA LTBGTR4CBL20 Cable length 2 0m E RS 422 conversion unit Sold separately Model name GT15 RS2T4 9P RS 232 RS 422 conversion RS 422 side connector 9 pins RS 422 conversion unit GT15 RS2T4 25P unit RS 422 side connector 25 pins Product name Description z Q He prd gt o WL z O 8 SYSTEM 1 The GT1655 V cannot be used 2 E Bus extension connector box Sold separately z lt Product name Description 2 O Bus extension connector For QCPU Q Mode Motion controller CPU Q series long distance 13 2m or u A9GT QCNB Oo box longer bus connection E Bus connector conversion box Sold separately me Zz Product name Description 2 Bus connector ATGT CNB For QnA ACPU Motion controller CPU A series long distance bus connection S conversion box For conversion from large type connector to small type connector 7 E an E CF card Sold separately Product name Model name Description a GT05 MEM 16MC Flash ROM 16MB Q i aw gt GT05 MEM 32MC Flash ROM 32MB E 2 5 of GT05 MEM 64MC Flash ROM 64MB a Of GT05 MEM 128MC Flash ROM 128MB GT05 MEM 256MC Flash ROM 256MB GT05 MEM 512MC Flash ROM 512MB z O CF car GT05 MEM 1GC Flash ROM 1GB E GT05 MEM 2GC Fla
216. or connecting a personal computer Project data read write FA transparent function MES interface function USB USB Full Speed 12Mbps Host 1ch Connector shape TYPE A Application For connecting a USB mouse keyboard USB memory data transfer data storage When formatting a USB memory to FAT16 Up to 2GB When formatting a USB memory to FAT32 Up to 32GB USB Full Speed 12Mbps Device 1ch Connector shape Mini B Application For connecting a personal computer Project data read write OS installation FA transparent function CF card Compact flash slot 1ch Connector shape TYPE I Application Data transfer data storage GOT startup When formatting a CF card to FAT16 Up to 2GB When formatting a CF card to FAT32 Up to 32GB Option function board For option function board mounting 1ch Extension unit 5 For communication unit option unit mounting 2ch Buzzer output Single tone tone length adjustable Protective structure Outside the enclosure IP67 4 Inside the enclosure IP2X External dimensions 241 9 49 W x 190 7 48 H x 52 2 05 D mm inch Panel cutting dimensions 227 8 94 W x 176 6 93 H mm inch Weight mounting fixtures are not included 1 7kg 3 7Ib 1 8kg 3 9Ib Compatible sonwara packade GT Designer3 Version1 01B or later GT Designer3 Version1 17T or P P g GT Designer2 Version2 96A or later later 3 12 3 2 Performance S
217. or more 26 1 02 or more 50 1 97 or more 36 1 42 or more 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more CF card extension unit 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more 50 1 97 or more 26 1 02 or more 50 1 97 or more 36 1 42 or more 50 1 97 or more External I O unit 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more 50 1 97 or more 26 1 02 or more 50 1 97 or more 36 1 42 or more 50 1 97 or more Sound output unit 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more 50 1 97 or more 26 1 02 or more 50 1 97 or more 36 1 42 or more 50 1 97 or more 80 3 15 or more 20 0 79 or more When the CF card is not used 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more gt When the CF card is used 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more 100 3 94 or more 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more 6 3 Mounting Position 100 39 4 or more 20 0 79 or more Unit mm inch 14 This value differs depending on the cable used Please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd The value indicated in the table is a reference value 2 This value is for use of the coaxial cable 3C 2V JIS C 3501 For specifications of the cable refer to the following manual lt _ 37 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals for GT Works3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manua
218. or store the GOT under pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure of altitude Om Oft Failure to observe this instruction may cause a malfunction When an air purge is made inside the control panel by adding pressure there may be a clearance between the surface sheet and the screen making it difficult to use the touch panel or the sheet may come off z 3 This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electrical a power distribution network and the machinery within the premises T Category II applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities z The surge voltage withstand level for up to the raged voltage of 300 V is 2500 V 4 This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in the environment where the equipment is used In pollution degree 2 only non conductive pollution occurs but temporary conductivity may be produced due to condensation 0 Z zZ Q ll Q O 3 1 General Specifications 3 1 3 2 Performance Specifications The performance specifications of the GT16 is as follows L3 3 2 1 GT1695M X 3 2 2 GT1685M S 3 2 3 GT1675M S GT1675M V GT1675 VN GT1672 VN 3 2 4 GT1665M S GT1665M V GT1662 VN 3 2 5 GT1655 V 3 2 1 GT1695M X Specifications Item GT1695M XTBA GT1695M XTBD Type TFT color liquid crystal display
219. ower cable Control panel inside Power cable Control panel inside I l l l l U MC Drive control p Drive co wire wire Terminal block Terminal block 7 4 2 Panel outside wiring When leading the power line and communication cable outside the panel open cable holes at two separate places to lead the cables separately out If cables are led out through the same cable hole for wiring reasons the cables are more easily influenced by noise Power line Power line vaai Communication W cable Communication C cable Cable hole Wiring for leading the power line and communication cable out from the panel Install the power line and communication cable as apart from each other as possible in the duct If the cables are installed closely with each other for wiring reasons using a separator made of metal can make the cables less influenced by noise Wiring duct Separator a Power line 100mm or more uy line Wiring of power lines and communication cables in the duct Power line Communication cable 7 8 7 4 Panel Inside Wiring Panel Outside Wiring 7 5 Attaching Surge Suppressor for Control Equipment If an improper operation such as communication error occurs in the GOT in synchronization with ON OFF of a particular control equipment hereinafter abbreviated to load such as MCCB electromagnetic contactor relay solenoid valve or induction motor the GOT may be influenced by surge noise
220. owever be free of charge should the cause of failure be attributable to Mitsubishi Electric Corporation 2 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 3 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced Replacing consumable parts such as the battery backlight and fuses Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi Any other failur
221. ownload the standard monitor OS communication driver option OS extended function OS and project data Mount units to GOT Check the Communication settings Connect the GOT and controller with a cable Turn on the power supply of GOT and the system of the connection destination Start the monitor End Refer to GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals or GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Write the OS and project data to be installed on the GOT from the PC to the CF card 1 Set the OS boot drive to A Standard CF Card 2 2 Write the standard monitor OS communication driver option OS extended function OS project data and special data into the CF card Refer to GT16 User s Manual Basic Utility Chapter 7 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD OS in this manual for the operations of GOT Check that the CF card access switch is off and insert the CF card into the GOT Turn on the CF card access switch L 8 OPTION Refer to GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used or GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2 GT Works2 1 2 Rough Pre operation Procedure OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 41 By connecting with the Ethernet interfa
222. pecifications 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Bright dots always lit and dark dots unlit may appear on a liquid crystal display panel due to its characteristics It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect The GOT screen saving backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the display screen and increases the backlight life ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached with the A part of the cover firmly pushed into Compliant with IP2X at the USB interface when a USB cable or USB memory is connected Note that this does not guarantee all users operation environment In addition the GOT may not be available for use in the environment where oil or chemicals are splashed over for a long period or where oil mist is filled For using multiple extension units a barcode reader or an RFID controller the total current for the extension units barcode reader or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply For the current for the extension units bar code reader or RFID controller and the current that the GOT can supply refer to the following manual lt 3 GOT1000 Series
223. pply Mount the option function board As necessary When transferring data from PC to built in flash memory and starting GOT with built in flash memory When transferring data from CF card to built in flash memory and starting GOT with built in flash memory y Connect GOT and PC with a USB cable or RS 232 cable Insert the CF card in the PC v Refer to GT Works3 Version1 Installation Instructions or GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Refer to GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals or GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual gt 7 WIRING L 8 OPTION When transferring data to CF card and starting GOT with CF card Insert the CF card in the PC Transfer the OS and project data to be installed on the GOT from the PC to the GOT 1 Install standard monitor OS communication driver extended function OS option OS to the GOT After installation is completed the GOT automatically restarts Write the OS and project data to be installed on the GOT from the PC to the CF card 1 Write the standard monitor OS communication driver extended function OS option OS project data in the CF card 2 Download the project data created by the PC 1 Check that the CF card access switch is off and insert the CF card into the GOT i Turn on the CF card access switch and then install or d
224. pports the controller For how to check the version of the communication driver refer to the following GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 8 COMMUNICATION WITH GOT 403 SIO status error Confirm communication pathway or modules Either of the overrun error parity bit error or flaming error was generated when the RS 422 RS 232 communication was received Confirm the cable omission the communication module mounting status status of the PLC and the transmission speed of the computer link Channel No is not displayed in error code or error message in the case an error occurs when using the multi channel function Refer to the following manual to identify the channel No in error GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2 GT Works2 Description of Checking for normal monitoring of each connection type 406 10 20 Specified station access is out of range Confirm station no Station numbers other than master local station are specified at the CC Link connection via G4 APLC CPU other than QCPU is accessed Confirm the station number of the project data 10 3 Error Message and System Alarm Error 7 Channel No Error message Action code storage e When monitoring the same network as the GOT The GOT accesses
225. put O Correct data Change the device data to be displayed to the BCD value Correct the input value to the 4 digits integer The contents of the recipe file are not normal 351 Recipe file error Confirm Confirm the contents of the recipe files in the CF card or USB memory x content of recipe file Reboot the GOT after deleting the recipe file in the CF card or USB memory format 10 18 10 3 Error Message and System Alarm 10 3 Error Message and System Alarm Error Channel No Error message Action code storage Recipe file make error Reboot Failed to generate recipe file 352 GOT after inserting memory x ead Reboot the GOT after installing the CF card or USB memory Failed t ite in th ipe file Unable to write Recipe file ng aie on is ners is Confirm the write protection of the CF card or USB memory 353 Confirm memory card is x insent d Confirm the contents of the CF card or USB memory i Do not pull out the CF card or USB memory while recipe is operating oo Error occurred while writing in the recipe file 354 Recipe file write error a z X Do not unplug the CF card or USB memory while recipe is operating Error occurred while writing in the recipe file EES Do not unplug the CF card or USB memory while recipe is operating 355 Recipe file read error j E a x e Confirm the contents device value of the recipe file in the CF card or USB memory
226. r device Depending on the units and cables connected to the GOT clearances more than the described dimensions can be required Therefore consider the connector dimensions and bending radius of the cable as well for installation For the lead in allowance for cables at the bottom of the GOT refer to the following lt 3 Appendix1 External Dimensions lt Panel thickness 2 to 4mm 0 08 to 0 16inch lt 6 3 Mounting Position 6 3 According to the dimensions in the following table leave clearances between the GOT and the other devices The values enclosed in square brackets apply to the case where no other equipment generating radiated noise such as a contactor or heat is installed near the GOT However keep the ambient temperature of the GOT to 55 C or lower Type GOT only GT1695M X GT1685M S 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more GT1675M S GT1675M V GT1675 VN GT1672 VN 50 1 97 or more 26 1 02 or more GT1665N S GT1665M V GT1662 VN 50 1 97 or more 36 1 42 or more GT1655 V 61 2 40 or more Bus connection unit is fitted 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more 50 1 97 or more 26 1 02 or more 50 1 97 or more 36 1 42 or more 50 1 97 or more Serial communication unit fitted 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more 50 1 97 or more 26 1 02 or more 50 1 97 or more 36 1 42 or mo
227. rature 25 C Z Battery replacement time reference 3 to 4 years Calculate the natural discharge amount of the battery as necessary 2 Check if the battery condition is normal within the utility Refer to the following for the details of battery status display Basic Utility 2 1 1 Time setting 6 e oO fo 3 4 Battery Specifications 3 19 4 PART NAME AND SETTINGS 4 1 Part Names and Settings of the GT1695 21 P OD C n 2S a a 3 U T IJ ZE peel MO 9 EE 1 N ma e o st ee tee TAN ie ae M l Sa I i 17 16 15 4 1 4 1 Part Names
228. re 49 1 93 or more RS 422 Conversion unit is fitted 50 1 97 or more 51 2 01 or more 63 2 48 or more 73 2 87 or more CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 fitted 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more 50 1 97 or more 24 0 94 or more MELSECNET H communication unit coaxial fitted 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more 50 1 97 or more 24 0 94 or more 50 1 97 or more 33 1 30 or more 50 1 97 or more 64 2 52 or more MELSECNET H communication unit optical fitted 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more 79 3 11 or more CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit fitted 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more 57 2 24 or more CC Link IE Field Network communication unit fitted 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more 57 2 24 or more Video input unit fitted 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more 2 RGB input unit fitted 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more Video RGB input unit fitted 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more 2 3 RGB output unit fitted 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more Multimedia unit fitted 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more 2 Printer unit fitted 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more 50 1 97 or more 26 1 02 or more 50 1 97 or more 86 1 42 or more 50 1 97 or more 29 1 14 or more CF card unit 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more 50 1 97
229. remove the CF card with the power supply of GOT is OFF or CF card access switch is OFF a Installation 7 When the CF card cover is fixed with the CF card cover fixing screw unscrew the screw 3 4 Turn on the CF card access switch b Removal 7 When the CF card cover is fixed with the CF card cover fixing screw unscrew the screw OPTION 8 3 Option 8 11 2 Open the CF card cover Turn off the CF card access switch and check that the CF card access LED turns off The CF card can be removed when the CF card access LED turns off even though the GOT s power is on 3 Press the CF card eject button and then the button pops out Press the button again and then the CF card pops out Remove the card Precautions for removing CF card 1 Do not insert or eject a CF card and do not turn off the GOT while the CF card access LED turns on Failure to do so might cause a data damage in the CF card and a malfunction with the CF card unit 2 When a CF card is removed from the CF card unit support the card with the hand because the card might pop out Failure to do so might cause the CF card to drop from the unit resulting in a damage or failure of the card E Memory card adaptor The memory card adaptor is used to convert the CF card into the memory card Type Il The memory card Type II is used to transmit the OS project data and to save the data of alarm history function or other functions by installin
230. rlier 1 GT1675M VTBA B February 2012 or later 2 B January 2012 or earlier 1 GT1675M VTBD C February 2012 or later 2 1 GT1675M VTBA with hardware version A Manufacture year and month January 2012 or earlier and GT1675M VTBD with hardware version B Manufacture year and month January 2012 or earlier 1 2 5 Turn off the GOT Disconnect the power supply cable and the communication cable Remove the GOT from the control panel Remove the right extension unit cover of the GOT Remove an extension unit including a bus connection unit if it is mounted Remove eight fixing screws Remove the backlight cables and the relay cables from the GOT board connector Since the relay connector adheres inside the GOT detach the connector and perform the removal Expanded figure of part A in step 4 9 6 Backlight Replacement 9 11 Q z lt O 2z zo ii G Ew Za 2 2 TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES 9 12 6 Remove the backlight cables from the cable holder A by pulling the backlight cables one by one in the arrow direction and then in the arrow II direction 8 Install a new backlight so that its top plate is inserted between the metal parts of the backlight replacement hole When inserting a new backlight into the backlight replacement hole of the GOT make sure not to damage the sheaths of the cables Insert the backlight all th
231. ror was displayed Proceed to 2 c The hardware such as a communication interface O No error has no error Proceed to 3 Status of the PLC CPU c Objects not displayed on the monitor screen Details O Found Example The numerical display object is not O Not found displayed Proceed to 3 Status of the PLC CPU 3 Status of the PLC CPU Phenomenon Cause status a PLC failure Action An error such as CONTROL BUS ERROR or SP UNIT LAY ERROR may have occurred O Occurs always Error code system alarm Example 1204 CPU H W fault Proceed to the following L3 10 2 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection The PLC CPU may be influenced by noise or the hardware may be faulty Occurrence frequency O Occurs sometimes Example Once a month Error code system alarm Example 1204 CPU H W fault O Operates normally Proceed to 4 GOT restoration procedure 10 4 10 1 GOT Restoration Sheet 4 GOT restoration procedure Follow the procedures below starting from a and in order to check if the GOT is restored If the GOT is not restored proceed to the next item Check item Cause a Press the GOT reset switch 1 3 O Restored O Not restored Proceed to b b Power the GOT ON OFF 2 3 O Restored O Not restored Proceed to c The GOT may have malfunctioned temporarily due to noise c Reset or
232. rovided that the customer notifies Mitsubishi Electric Corporation of the intention the application is clearly defined and any special quality is not required GOT is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Microsoft Windows Windows NT Windows Server Windows Vista and Windows 7 are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Pentium and Celeron are a registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd in the United States and other countries Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners SH NA 080928ENG O GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GOT1io9oo0 GT16 User s Manual Hardware MoDEL GT16 U HW SHO E MODEL 1D7MD3 SH NA 080928ENG 0 1401 MEE MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permissi
233. rror code 100 error occurs correct the error according to the M8060 description 3 The error code displayed on GOT is calculated by changing the error code Hexadecimal displayed on the servo amplifier to the decimal number and adding 20000 to it When referring to the manual of servo amplifier by the error code displayed as a GOT system alarm subtract 20000 from the GOT error code and change its lower three digits to the hexadecimal number Example When GOT system alarm is 20144 the error code of servo amplifier becomes 90H 4 Channel No will not be stored depending on the error code For channel No storage availability for each error code refer to the following c 10 3 2 List of error message system alarm 5 An alarmed drive cannot be confirmed in the system alarm regarding file access however it can be specified by confirming the file access error signal b7 to 10 of system signal 2 2 10 3 Error Message and System Alarm 10 3 2 List of error message system alarm Q Z lt The system alarm detected with GOT is shown below Z Zz zo Error Channel No ZE Error message Action to code storage Zo lt 2 Decrease the number of objects from the displayed screen For the z Set monitor points too large number of maximum objects for 1 screen refer to the following 303 Decrease setting points L gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions g GT Des
234. ry that is dropped or given an impact Before touching the unit be sure to touch grounded metal or similar objects to discharge the static electricity from human body Not doing so can cause a failure or malfunction of the unit When disposing of the product handle it as industrial waste The GOT does not include consumable components that will cause the shorten life However the battery liquid crystal screen and backlight have each life length It is recommended to replace the battery and the cold cathode tube backlight periodically For the replacement of the liquid crystal screen please consult Mitsubishi Electric System Service Refer to the following section for the lives of the battery liquid crystal screen and backlight 3 2 Performance Specifications 9 1 Daily Inspection E Daily inspection items No Inspection Item Inspection Method Criterion Action Check for loose Retighten screws within the 1 GOT mounting status Securely mounted a mounting screws specified torque range Retighten screws Loose terminal screws Not loose Retighten terminal screws with screwdriver Connection Proximate solderless 2 j Visual check Proper intervals Correct status terminals Retighten connector fixing Loose connectors Visual check Not loose screws Dirt on protection sheet Visual check Not outstanding Replace with new one Usage 3 i No foreign matter status Foreign material attachme
235. s 10 3 Error Message and System Alarm Error Channel No Error message Action code storage Available memory of the CF card is insufficient Confirm the available Insufficient memory media memory of the CF card 330 capacity Confirm M card The available memory can be confirmed by system information screen x capacity which is described in GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals or GT Designer2 VersionL Screen Design Manual The CF card is not installed or in the drive access switch is OFF in drive Memory card not installed or M M 331 i e Install the CF card in the specified drive x CARD switched OFF Turn ON the access switch a CF card is not formatted or formatted incorrectly 332 Memory media is not formatted x Format the CF card 333 Unable to overwrite Memory CF card is write protected x card is write protected Cancel the write protection of CF card 334 Memory media error Replace CF card is faulty X memory media Replace the CF card 335 Memory card battery voltage The battery voltage of the CF card is low x low Replace battery Replace the battery of the CF card Either of the following folder or file with the name same as the file to be created exists in the storage destination CF card or USB memory 337 File output failed Confirm output Folder storing data x file path e Write protect file Delete the above folder or file
236. s The manufacturer itself which manufactures the mechanical unit must finally judge the method and others to match the EMC directives 5 1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive 5 1 1 EMC directive The standards of the EMC Directive are shown below Applied standard EN61131 2 2007 Test standard EN55011 Radiated noise Test details Electromagnetic emissions from the product are measured Standard value 30M 230MHz QP 30dB uV m 30m in measurement range 230M 1000MHz QP 37dB LV m 30m in measurement range 3 2 3 EN55011 Conducted noise Electromagnetic emissions from the product to the power line is measured 150k 500kHz QP 79dB Mean 66dB 2 500k 30MHz QP 73dB Mean 60dB 2 EN61000 4 2 Electrostatic immunity Immunity test in which static electricity is applied to the cabinet of the equipment 4kV Contact discharge 8kV Aerial discharge EN61000 4 3 Radiated field AM modulation Immunity test in which field is irradiated to the product 80 1000MHz 10V m 1 4 2GHz 3V m 2 0 2 7GHz 1V m 80 AM modulation 1kHz EN61000 4 4 Fast transient burst noise 1 Immunity test in which burst noise is applied to the power line and signal lines Power line 2kV Digital 1 0 24V or higher 1kV Digital I O 24V or less gt 250V Analog I O signal lines gt 250V EN61000 4 5 Surge immunity Immunity test in which li
237. semble the case in the reverse procedure of disassembly Tighten the fixing screws on the GOT rear face with a torque of 0 36 to 0 48 Nem When installing the case make sure that the cables are not stuck between the case and the GOT 9 16 9 6 Backlight Replacement E For GT16 60VLTN a Zz lt 7 Turn off the GOT o PAA Ze 2 Disconnect the power supply cable and the communication cable w 9 Remove the GOT from the control panel Z ie z 3 Remove the right extension unit cover of the GOT Remove an extension unit including a bus connection unit if it is mounted 5 Remove the case after passing the battery holder through the mounting hole When removing take care of not cutting the cable of the battery holder Expanded figure of part A in step 4 JE SS 9 6 Backlight Replacement 9 17 8 9 9 18 Press the backlight fixing latch black with your fingers and pull out the backlight to the left Pull out the backlight so that the backlight does not hit the packing D 2 Na Kon BAe Install a new backlight in the reverse procedure of removal When inserting a new backlight into the backlight replacement hole of the GOT make sure not to damage the sheaths of the cables Insert the backlight until it is fixed by the latch black Pull the cable tight toward the right side of
238. ser s Manual e GT16 User s Manual Basic Utility e GT16 Handy GOT User s Manual e GT15 User s Manual e GT14 User s Manual e GT12 User s Manual e GT11 User s Manual GT11 Handy GOT User s Manual e GT10 User s Manual Operating the utility Configuring the gateway function GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3 GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Configuring the MES interface function Works3 GOT1000 Series User s Manual Extended Functions Option Configuring the extended function and option function f Functions for GT Works3 Using a personal computer as the GOT GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS Abbreviations and generic terms used in this manual are as follows E GOT Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT1695 GT1695M X Abbreviation of GT1695M XTBA GT1695M XTBD GT1685 GT1685M S Abbreviation of GT1685M STBA GT1685M STBD GT1675M S Abbreviation of GT1675M STBA GT1675M STBD GT1675 GT1675M V_ Abbreviation of GT1675M VTBA GT1675M VTBD GT1675 VN Abbreviation of GT1675 VNBA GT1675 VNBD GT1672 GT1672 VN Abbreviation of GT1672 VNBA GT1672 VNBD meiaee GT1665M S Abbreviation of GT1665M STBA GT1665M STBD GT1665M
239. sh ROM 2GB z oO GT05 MEM 4GC Flash ROM 4GB zZ GT05 MEM 8GC Flash ROM 8GB GT05 MEM 16GC Flash ROM 16GB Commercially available CF card 2 1 ACF card with more than 2GB can be used for the GT16 with the following versions of OSes installed Z Boot OS version 05 09 00AF or later x Standard monitor OS version 05 09 00 or later z If the above versions of OSes are not installed install the OSes to the GOT by using GT Designer3 Version1 17T or later If the OS version is earlier than the above OS versions a CF card with more than 2GB is not recognized correctly GT Designer2 Version O is not supported 2 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the validated models refer to Technical News GOT A 0010 List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series separately available or contact your local distributor z O m oO e 2 2 Component List 2 13 E USB memory Sold separately Model name Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the validated models refer to Technical News GOT A 0010 List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series separately available or contact your local distributor Product name Description USB memory Commercially available USB memory 1 E USB mouse Sold separately Model name Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the validated models refer to Technical News GOT A 0010 List
240. signer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual For GOT1000 Series 2 3 Stored in CD ROM GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual For GOT1000 Series 3 3 SH 080530ENG 1D7M25 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 1 3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 2 3 Stored in CD ROM GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 3 3 SH 080532ENG 1D7M26 SH 080544ENG GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual Stored in CD ROM 1D7M32 SH 080545ENG GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual Stored in CD ROM 1D7M33 GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual Stored in CD ROM SEFUOOSMENG 1D7M63 The following table lists the manual relevant to GT Works3 product Refer to each manual for any purpose E Screen creation software manuals Manual Name Packaging Manual Number GT Works3 Version1 Installation Procedure Manual Enclosed in product Model code GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 1 2 2 2 Stored in CD ROM SH 080866ENG 1D7MB9 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions 1 2 2 2 Stored in CD ROM SH 080867ENG 1D7MC1 GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD ROM SH 080861ENG 1D7MB1 GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 E Connection manuals Manual Name Stored in CD ROM Packaging SH 080862ENG 1D7MB2 Manual Number Model code GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Pro
241. ss Unit mm inch 5 4 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant Product 5 20 VOLTAGE OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS w 2 He S Ww x a INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 5 4 3 Grounding the cable Ground the cable and grounding wire to the control panel where the GOT and base unit are installed 5 21 1 Ground the braided shield portion of the cable to the control panel with the cable clamp AD75CK Braided shield Cable clamps For the cable clamp attaching details refer to AD75CK type Cable Clamping Instruction Manual lt IB 68682 gt a For GT15 CHEXSS 1 and GT15 COBS Ground the ground wire to the FG terminal of the GOT power supply section iS Bus connection cable b For other bus connection cables Ground the braided wire for grounding to the control panel by tightening a screw GOT FG terminal FG wire 2 Do not arrange the cable clamp adjacent to other cables which do not clamp Noise from the control panel may access the GOT from the cable clamp and cause adverse effects 5 4 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant Product 6 INSTALLATION mm W CAUTION e Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual Do not expose the GOT to
242. ss to the file register 359 peripheral device Execute it x after Wait until the processing of other peripherals end and execute the recipe function again _ RENT Zero division occurred by the data operational expression 0 divisor division error Confirm i ore 360 Review the data operational expression so that the divisor should not X operation expression become 0 361 Specified device No is out of The entered file number is out of range X range Check the entered file number and enter a valid value 1 to 9999 When controllers are controlled with the GOT s time action function the 362 Invalid device value in time set No is our of range or the set device values regarding the operation X action setting settings are out of range or invalid Set valid values 370 Upper and lower limit value The setting of lower upper limit value is Upper limit lt Lower limit x error Confirm value setting Correct the setting so as to be Upper limit gt Lower limit Available memory of the USB memory is insufficient Insufficient USB drive capacity 380 f Confirm the available memory of the USB memory and increase the x Confirm the drive capacity ae memory if it is low 10 19 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION o e e x N WW a a 2 0 APPENDICES Error code 381 Error message USB drive is not installed or in a removable state Action If the USB memory is not ins
243. ssed Used for stopping the access to the CF card before removing the CF card from the GOT 13 CF card access switch ON CF card being accessed CF card removal prohibited OFF CF card not accessed CF card removal possible Terminati ist tti itch 14 Smp R ae For switching on and off of the terminating resistor for the RS 422 485 communication port inside the cover 15 Optional function board interface For installing the optional function board z lt w no lt 0 zz 22 Par awn Hardware reset switch 16 Reset switch Inoperative in the bus connection or with the bus connection unit installed 17 Hole for unit installation fitting Hole for inserting the unit installation fitting 18 Battery cover Houses the battery 19 Installation switch Used for OS installations at the GOT startup 20 Functional ground terminal For grounding EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE Ly Cee Connector used for the RS 232 interface The specification of the connector used for the RS 232 interface of GT1655 is as follows Manufacturer DDK Ltd Model name 17LE 23090 27 D4CK or equivalent product Connector used for the RS 422 485 interface The specification of the connector used for the RS 422 485 interface of GT1655 is as follows Manufacturer Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co Ltd Model name HDR EC14LFDT1 SLE or equivalent product INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 4 5 Part N
244. stal display comprises of a great number of display elements Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect The GOT screen saving backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the display screen and increases the backlight life ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached with the A part of the cover firmly pushed into Compliant with IP2X at the USB interface when a USB cable or USB memory is connected Note that this does not guarantee all users operation environment In addition the GOT may not be available for use in the environment where oil or chemicals are splashed over for a long period or where oil mist is filled For using multiple extension units a barcode reader or an RFID controller the total current for the extension units barcode reader or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply For the current for the extension units bar code reader or RFID controller and the current that the GOT can supply refer to the following manual lt 3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 2 8 Multi channel Function The function version A is not compatible with 10BASE T For how to check the function version refer to the following KE Appendix2 Co
245. sually exist but occasional temporary conductivity occurs due to the accumulated dust Generally this is the level for inside the control panel equivalent a control room or on the floor of a typical factory Pollution levels An environment where conductive dust exits and conductivity may be generated due to the accumulated dust An environment for a typical factory floor Pollution level4 Continuous conductivity may occur due to rain snow etc An outdoor environment SPECIFICATIONS 5 2 4 Grounding PART NAME AND SETTINGS The following are applicable ground terminals Use them in the grounded state Be sure to ground the GOT for ensuring the safety and complying with the EMC Directive Functional grounding Improves the noise resistance Ww we aay are of gt A 5 2 5 External wiring 1 External devices When a device with a hazardous voltage circuit is externally connected to the GOT select a model which complies with the Low Voltage Directive s requirements for isolation between the primary and secondary circuits a 2 Insulation requirements 5 Dielectric withstand voltages are shown in the following table lt n zZ Reinforced Insulation Withstand Voltage Installation Category Il source IEC664 Rated voltage of hazardous voltage area Surge withstand voltage 1 2 50 ws 150 VAC or below 2500V o 300 VAC or below 4000V Z ma Q H oO 5 2 Requirements for Conpliance with the Lo
246. sule FFK120A C10 and general purpose interface module NC1L RS2 FFU120B GT09 C30R41001 6T Cable length 3m RS A22 GT09 C100R41001 6T Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to FUJI RS 232C 485 interface capsule FFK120A C10 and general purpose interface module NC1L RS4 Cable GT09 C200R41001 6T E Connection cables for PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLCs Sold separately Product name RS 232 cable Cable length 20m GT09 C300R41001 6T Model name GT09 C30R20901 25P Cable length 30m Cable length 3m FFU120B Description For connecting GOT to PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX RS422 232C conversion adapter GT09 C30R20902 9P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to the tool port or RS232C port of PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC computer communication unit GT09 C30R20903 9P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to the RS232C port of PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC GT09 C30R20904 3C Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to the RS232C port of PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC E Connection cables for YASKAWA PLCs Sold separately Product Model name Description name GT09 C30R20201 9P Cable length 3m GT09 C30R20202 15P Cable length 3m RS 232 For connecting GOT to YASKAWA PLC pane GT09 C30R20203 9P Cable length 3m GT09 C30R20204 14P Cable length 3m GT09 C30R20205 25P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to YASKAWA MEMOBUS module GT09
247. surface to seal the space so that the leak of electric wave can be suppressed Manufacturer KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES CO LTD Series model name UC series Recommended Product Our test has been carried out on a panel having the damping characteristics of 37dB max and 30dB mean measured by 3m method with 30 to 300MHz Connection of power and ground wires Ground and power supply wires for the GOT must be connected as described below a b Provide a grounding point near the GOT Short circuit the LG and FG terminals of the GOT LG line ground FG frame ground and ground them with the thickest and shortest wire possible The wire length must be 30cm 11 81in or shorter The LG and FG terminals function is to pass the noise generated in the PC system to the ground so an impedance that is as low as possible must be ensured As the wires are used to relieve the noise the wire itself carries a large noise content and thus short wiring means that the wire is prevented from acting as an antenna Note A long conductor will become a more efficient antenna at high frequency The earth wire led from the earthing point must be twisted with the power supply wires By twisting with the earthing wire noise flowing from the power supply wires can be relieved to the earthing However if a filter is installed on the power supply wires the wires and the earthing wire may not need to be twisted 5 1 Requirements to Meet EMC Direc
248. t communicating between j Ethernet module impossible 422 CPU and E71 Confirm CPU 2 O A Confirm whether there is error in PLC CPU by GX Developer etc i Confirm buffer memory The station number set in the project data and the station number set in the switching station No device do not exist in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 e Add the station number set in the project data to the Ethernet setting of GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 e When using the station No switching function check the data of the T switching station No device Insufficient network table seed tes 423 When the station number specified in the switching station No device O information Add station no i f is not set in the Ethernet setting add the station number to the Ethernet setting When the station number does not exist in the system change the data of the switching station No device Set the station number so that it becomes the same as the station number of the PLC side Ethernet module set in the parameter setting of GX Developer 10 21 10 3 Error Message and System Alarm MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION o e e x N WW a a 2 O APPENDICES Error Channel No Error message Action code storage The station number set in the GOT s utility is the same as the station number set in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 the s
249. talled install it If the USB memory is ready to be removed install it again Channel No storage x 382 383 USB drive is not formatted Unable to overwrite USB drive is write protected Memory card is not formatted or in a format not conformed by a GOT Reformat the USB memory USB memory is write protected Cancel the write protection of USB memory x 384 USB drive error Replace USB drive USB memory is faulty Replace the USB memory 402 Communication timeout Confirm communication pathway or modules The time out error occurred during communicating Confirm the cable omission the communication unit mounting status and status of the PLC Channel No is not displayed in error code or error message in the case an error occurs when using the multi channel function Refer to the following manual to identify the channel No in error 3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2 GT Works2 Description of Checking for normal monitoring of each connection type This error may occur when the load of PLC CPU becomes heavier while accessing other stations In such case transfer the data of the other station to the host station PLC CPU and monitor them at the host Put COM instruction when the PLC scanning is long Check if the version of the communication driver su
250. tation number of the PLC side Ethernet module or in the project data Check the following contents so that the multiple station numbers should not be the same Same sta on GOT amp project e Check the GOT s station number in the GOT s utility 424 data Review communication e Check the station number set in the project data O parameter Check the station number set in the Ethernet setting Set the station number so that it becomes the same as the station number of the PLC side Ethernet module set in the parameter setting of GX Developer When using the station No switching function check the data of the switching station No device 425 A duplicate IP address has been A duplication of IP address with another device has been detected O detected Confirm the setting Change the IP address of GOT or the other device A device outside the range of PLC CPU file registers and the buffer PLC cannot handle as E 448 memory was specified requested Correct devices Correct the monitor device by setting file register of the PLC CPU moots Set the address for the special function module in the GOT monitor Dedicated device is out of 449 available range O range Confirm device range a Set the device in the GOT monitor available range The path has been switched or timeout occurred in the redundant system e Check the PLC CPU to know if the path has been switched e Check the cable connection status the communication
251. te core EEEE Soudi KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES CO LTD thick wire as gy the panel RFC H13 or equivalent product to ae the ground cable connected to the O Effective panel having the GOT as shown in Fig C reduces the influence of noise O Ineffective When wiring as shown in Fig C is difficult perform wiring as shown in Fig D Fig Ground cable D zZ Ferrite core Ground to _ the panel 10 1 GOT Restoration Sheet MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 2 e e x N wW a a 2 0 APPENDICES 10 9 7 Power supply system aoa Bower PLC power PLC The power from the same system is SINR used for the GOT I O equipment O Used Current status VO power GOT Pan vo a suchi as relay and power A O Not used Main circuit power quip equipment such as servo amplifier T ano w ae ixeiation tanei Connecting an isolation transformer Measure for the solation transtormer Bavienenh for me PLC power PLC as well as separating the wiring of T P og I the GOT power from that of the O Effective which the power GOT VO power power of the I O equipment and i from the same 6 6 lO O Ineffective i ee equipment power equipment reduces the system is used Main circuit power i equipment influence of noise 10 10 10 1 GOT Restoration Sheet E System configuration check sheet Fill in the brackets with the unit module name 1 S
252. ted Approve Clear trigger setup in the scatter graph data Set the Operation at frequency over time to Initialize and Continue in scatter graph 315 Device writing error Correct Error occurred while writing in the device device Correct the device In indirect specification of comment parts number the data operation Cannot display or input f result exceeded the range in which device type can be expressed 316 operation value Review f an Review the data operational expression in order not exceeding the range X ion p in which the device type can be expressed Data of an object to which Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied is set are collected too frequently or the number of objects has Too high frequency of data exceeded the number of objects collectable simultaneously 317 collection Set a longer cycle for trigger occurrence to each object Review conditions e Make the settings so that 257 or more display triggers of objects to which Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied is set do not occur simultaneously 320 Specified object does not exist The part file does not exist or out of range Create the part file and download to GOT The monitored device No is out of the permissible area of the targeted 322 Dedicated device is out of PLC CPU range Confirm device range Set the device within the range that can be monitored by the monitored PLC CPU and parameter setting
253. ted with a wire Panel grounding Panel grounding Bi u 2 28 225 Do not connect the ground cables of the power equipment and control equipment with a wire a a a If the cables are connected noise from the power equipment may influence the control equipment causing malfunction ma E Recommended terminal shape 6 Terminal Solderless Terminal Solderless z Q 3 2 screw terminal screw terminal J 6 2 5 x Ge iv or less 3 2 6 2mm Sr or less When wiring one cable to When wiring two cables to one terminal one terminal Applicable solderless terminal RAV1 25 3 V2 S3 3 V2 N3A FV2 N3A OPTION 7 3 Grounding 7 5 7 3 2 Wiring related malfunction causes and the measures examples The malfunction causes in grounding the GOT include potential difference caused by groundings and noise Potential difference and noise may be reduced by taking the following measures E Wiring of GOT s ground cable and power line When the ground cable and power line of the GOT are installed together the GOT may malfunction due to noise Separating the ground cable and power line of the GOT in wiring reduces the influence of noise y GOT IG EG Power for the power equipment Power for the power equipment Good example The ground and power cables Bad example The ground and power cables are are separated in wiring installed together E Leading of the ground cable from the panel having a control equipment in t
254. tem alarm 502 Warning Backlight needs replacement soon Refer to the following for the system alarm display L3 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions 11 ALARM GT Designer2 VersionL Screen Design Manual 8 ALARM Precautions for the backlight shutoff status In the backlight shutoff status the touch key operates Early replacement of backlight is recommended 9 6 9 5 Backlight Shutoff Detection and Replacement 9 6 Backlight Replacement This section explains the backlight replacing methods 9 6 1 Applicable backlight Q z lt O 2z lt 0 ii G Ew ZA 7 2 The following backlights are applicable for GT16 The following models use LED backlights Therefore no backlight replacement is required o GT1655 V e Other GT16 models with function version H or later S For how to check the function version refer to the following 5 Appendix2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards 3 Model name Description Target GOT E GT16 90XLTT For 15 high intensity wide angle view TFT XGA GT1695M xX 3 GT16 80SLTT For 12 1 high intensity wide angle view TFT SVGA GT1685M S 2 GT16 70SLTT For 10 4 high intensity wide angle view TFT SVGA GT1675M S 3 ih GT16 70VLTT For 10 4 high intensity wide angle view TFT VGA GT1675M V GT16 70VLTTA For 10 4 high intensity wide angle view TFT VGA GT1675M V 2 a GT16 70VLTN For 10 4 TFT
255. the CF card leading to failure or damage of the card 2 CF card inserting removing method with multimedia unit or CF card unit a Installing e Open the CF card cover and turn off the CF card access switch of the unit When using the multimedia unit When using the CF card unit 2 Insert the CF card into the CF card connector with the face out When using the multimedia unit When using the CF card unit 3 Turn on the CF card access switch 8 3 Option OPTION b Removal t Open the CF card cover Turn off the CF card access switch of the unit and check that the CF card access LED turns off When the LED turns off the CF card can be removed even while the GOT is on When using the multimedia unit When using the CF card unit Ad 2 Press the CF card eject button to pop out the CF card and remove it When using the multimedia unit When using the CF card unit Precautions for removing CF card 1 Do not insert or eject a CF card and do not turn off the GOT while the CF card access LED turns on Failure to do so might cause a data damage in the CF card and a malfunction with the CF card unit 2 When a CF card is removed from the CF card unit support the card with the hand because the card might pop out Failure to do so might cause the CF card to drop from the unit resulting in a damage or failure of the card 8 10 8 3 Option 3 CF card inserting removing method with CF card extension unit Install
256. the above To install a CF card to a multimedia unit formatting in FAT32 is recommended Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the validated models refer to Technical News GOT A 0010 List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series separately available or contact your local distributor For the white frame other than the display section use the model Note that this does not guarantee all users operation environment In addition the GOT may not be available for use in the environment where oil or chemicals are splashed over for a long period or where oil mist is filled A CF card with more than 2GB can be used for the GT16 with the following versions of OSes installed Boot OS version 05 09 00AF or later e Standard monitor OS version 05 09 00 or later If the above versions of OSes are not installed install the OSes to the GOT by using GT Designer3 Version1 17T or later If the OS version is earlier than the above OS versions a CF card with more than 2GB is not recognized correctly GT Designer2 Version O is not supported The USB interface on the GOT front face cannot be used with this item 8 6 8 3 Option 8 3 2 Installation procedure This section describes how to install a option on a GOT E CF card 1 CF card inserting removing method with CF card interface of GOT Install remove the CF card with the power supply of GOT is OFF or CF card access switch is OFF a Installing
257. the backlight when using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the user Not doing so can cause an electric shock Replacing a backlight without removing the GOT from the control panel can cause the backlight to drop resulting in an injury CAUTION Wear gloves for the backlight replacement when using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the user Not doing so can cause an injury Before replacing a backlight allow 5 minutes or more after turning off the GOT when using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the user Not doing so can cause a burn from heat of the backlight DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste When disposing of batteries separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations For details of the battery directive in EU member states refer to BHandling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations Refer to Appendix 3 for details of the regurated models Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and or relevant unit s in the manner they will not be exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of this manual as they are precision devices Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail Check if the u
258. the error code added Feb 2013 SH NA 080928ENG L Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1 67V Corrective action for the error code added Error code list deleted Continued to next page REVISIONS 1 The manual number is given on the left bottom of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Revision Jun 2013 SH NA 080928ENG M Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1 74C e Description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed The company name of Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd is changed to FUJI ELECTRIC CO LTD The company name of Panasonic Corporation is changed to Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co Ltd Sep 2013 SH NA 080928ENG N Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1 100E Jan 2014 SH NA 080928ENG O Change of the protective ground to the functional ground e Change of the functional ground symbol e Backlight change associated with the LCD change of the following models supported GT1695M X GT1685M S GT1675M S GT1675M V GT1675 VN GT1672 VN GT1665M S GT1665M V GT1662 VN This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2010 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION REVISIONS 2 WARRANTY Please
259. the following for the details of connection statuses GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2 GT Works2 8 4 1 Applicable cable The following cables are applicable for GT16 This section shows the conversion cable for connecting to the RS 422 485 interface Refer to the following for cables other than the connection cable for RS 422 485 interface L gt 2 2 2 Option Product name Model Description pa connector GT16 CO2R4 9S RS 422 485 connector lt gt RS 422 side connector 9pins conversion cable RS 422 connector conversion cable FA LTBGTR4CBL05 Cable length 0 5m RS 485 connector lt 5 RS 422 485 connector lt gt terminal block conversion FA LTBGTR4CBL10 Cable length 1 0m RS 485 terminal block converter module with modules with cable FA LTBGTR4CBL20 Cable length 2 0m dedicated connection cable 8 4 2 Installing procedure This section describes how to install the RS 422 connector conversion cable or the RS 485 connector lt gt terminal block conversion modules with cable to the RS 422 485 connector of GOT E RS 422 connector conversion cable or RS 485 connector terminal block conversion modules with cable f Power off the GOT 2 Insert the 14 pin side connector of the RS 422 connector conversion cable or the RS 485 connector lt gt terminal block conversion modules with cable to the RS 422 485 int
260. the other networks with the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 PLC to PLC network or CC Link IE Controller Network connection Confirm the network number of the project data so as not to access to other networks 407 Accessed other network e When monitoring other networks O Change network setting Reconfigure the Routing Information Setting of GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 or the Routing parameters of GX Developer e When using GT15 75J71LP23 Z GT15 75J71BR13 Z Other networks cannot be monitored Confirm the network number of the project data so as not to access to other networks Cannot perform operation The operation which could not be performed during RUN of PLC CPU 410 because of PLC run mode stop was performed O the PLC Stop the PLC CPU Memory cassette is write The memory cassette installed in the PLC CPU is EPROM or E PROM 411 protected Check the memory and it is in a protected status O cassette Confirm the memory cassette installed in PLC CPU Cannot read write device The key word is set in PLC CPU 412 protected by keyword Remove S Cancel the key word keyword eT ASCII code is selected in Ethernet operations of the PLC side setting 420 E71 specification is ASCII f O Select Binary code 421 E71 is set as read only Clear The Ethernet module on the PLC side is set in read only O setting Set the Ethernet module on the PLC side to write enabled a PLC CPU error Communication between PLC CPU and the PLC side No
261. the tray Insert the tray until it is fixed Refer to figure in step 6 Assemble the case in the reverse procedure of disassembly Tighten the fixing screws on the GOT rear face with a torque of 0 36 to 0 48 Nem When installing the case make sure that the cables are not stuck between the case and the GOT 9 6 Backlight Replacement 10 TROUBLESHOOTING a Zz lt z6 iG This chapter explains the GOT restoration sheet troubleshooting in the bus connection and the error message system 2 a alarm list z 10 1 GOT Restoration Sheet This section provides restoration methods for the case the GOT does not operate normally which are listed in check sheets The following explains how to use each sheet o e e x N WW a a 2 fe ao 1 When the GOT does not operate or malfunctions GOT status check sheet When the GOT does not operate or malfunctions identify the cause of the malfunction etc with BGOT status check sheet and take corrective action When the GOT is restored see the status for a while 2 When the wiring status needs to be improved GOT installation status check sheet When the noise caused by the GOT wiring status is considered to have caused the malfunction etc based on the check result of 1 above take corrective action for wiring using HGOT installation status check sheet When the GOT is restored see the status for a while APPENDICES 3 When corrective action oth
262. tion code storage 587 Specified record number does The advanced record of non existing number is about to be executed x not exist Execute record of existing number Saving recipe is about to be executed to the record of which recipe device F value cannot be edited Cannot save recipe data to read 588 aes Make the recipe device value of the record editable with Advanced x 7 Recipe Setting of GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 or specify the record of which recipe device value can be edited Saving recipe is about to be executed to the advanced recipe setting that Recipe device save error 589 is set for not using file X Recipe file does not exist Specify the advanced recipe setting that uses file Recipe device upload error Loading recipe is about to be executed to the record of which recipe 590 Recipe device value does not device value is not set x exist Specify the record of which recipe device value is set The advanced recipe setting is not correct Advanced Recipe error Check 591 recibe data Confirm the advanced recipe setting of the project data and download it x i A p to the GOT again FNRS Logging file error 595 Logging file error r i s x When collecting data again delete logging files and management files 2 Logging setting does not exist or setting value error 596 Logging settirig does not exist or Specify an existing logging setting in the historical trend graph setting and x
263. tive 5 1 3 Noise filter power supply line filter The noise filter power supply line filter is a device effective to reduce conducted noise Except some models installation of a noise filter onto the power supply lines is not necessary However conducted noise can be reduced if it is z installed The noise filter is generally effective for reducing conducted noise in the band of 10MHz or less Usage of the following filters is recommended wi Model name FN343 3 01 FN660 6 06 ZHC2203 11 Manufacturer SCHAFFNER SCHAFFNER TDK Rated current 3A 6A 3A 5 Ke Rated voltage 250V The precautions required when installing a noise filter are described below gt O 1 Do not install the input and output cables of the noise filter together to prevent the output side noise will be inducted into the input side cable where noise has been eliminated by the noise filer Yn ra O Input side Input side 3 power supply side power supply side m E n a Induction Z W Zo Ego Output side Output side zz device side device side lt u e Installing the input and output cables e Separate the input cable from the together will cause noise induction output cable 2 Connect the noise filter s ground terminal to the control panel with the shortest cable as possible approx 10cm 3 94 in or less Ww p2 AT Ho ox gt A INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION
264. tor shape TYPE A Application For connecting a USB mouse keyboard USB memory data transfer data storage When formatting a USB memory to FAT16 Up to 2GB USB When formatting a USB memory to FAT32 Up to 32GB 1 USB Full Speed 12Mbps Device 1ch Connector shape Mini B Application For connecting a personal computer Project data read write OS installation FA transparent function Compact flash slot 1ch Connector shape TYPE I Application Data transfer data storage GOT startup When formatting a CF card to FAT16 Up to 2GB When formatting a CF card to FAT32 Up to 32GB CF card Option function board For option function board mounting 1ch Extension unit 5 For communication unit option unit mounting 2ch Buzzer output Single tone tone length adjustable Protective structure Outside the enclosure IP67 4 Inside the enclosure IP2X External dimensions 316 12 44 W x 242 9 53 H x 52 2 05 D mm inch Panel cutting dimensions 302 11 89 W x 228 8 98 H mm inch Weight mounting fixtures are not included 2 7 kg 5 9lb Compatible software package GT Designer3 Version1 01B or later GT Designer2 Version2 90U or later 3 2 Performance Specifications 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Bright dots always lit and dark dots unlit may appear on a liquid crystal display panel due to its characteristics It is impossible to completely
265. trated below and insert the ground wire into the ferrite core Peel the sheath with the length shown below at both ends of the cable and expose the shield braided wire for grounding For grounding with cable clamps refer to Section 5 4 3 GOT side a ZCAT3035 1330 a PLC GOT side H N Jf s 60 or less 60 or less 2 36 Ground wires 2 36 360 or less 40 280mm 40 360 or less 14 17 darp VOORN uae 14 17 Unit mm inch 5 15 5 4 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant Product c For other bus connection cables e Wind cable shield material around the cable and pull out the grounding braided wire of the cable shield material with the length shown below e Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the position as illustrated below and insert the braided wire for grounding into the ferrite core GOT side Ferrite Core a ZCAT3035 1330 PLC side Cable shield material 3 15 Grounding braided wire 3 15 40 or less eomm iol nen _ 40 or less 1 57 Grounding braided wire 1 57 Unit mm inch 50mm 1 97 inch 2 CPU direct connection and computer link connection e Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the position as illustrated below GOT side PLC side 100 or less 3 94 Ferrite Core ca ZCAT3035 1 830 100 or less
266. uit breaker MCCB electromagnetic contactor relay solenoid valve or induction motor to supress the noise 3 Releasing noise to the ground a Make sure to connect the ground cable to the ground b Use a short and thick cable to lower its ground resistance c Ground the power system and the control system separately OPTION 7 1 Power Supply Wiring e Make wiring connections to the power supply I O equipment and power equipment separately by system as shown below When frequent noise is identified connect an isolation transformer Wiring diagram for power supply Gor oa Main power power 3 I O power os oo Oo 0 O oO ale GOT aN T1 o o gt I O equipment Main circuit power Oo Oo gt Main circuit equipment Twist 100V AC 200V AC or 24V DC cable as closely as possible and connect the cable of the minimum length between modules Also use the thickest cable as possible Max 2mm to minimize the voltage drop Use M3 solderless terminals and securely tighten them with a tightening torque of 0 5 to 0 8Nem so that no problem will result Separate the 100V AC 200V AC or 24V DC cable from the main circuit lines high voltage large current and or I O signal lines Keep a distance of 100mm or more As measures against surge due to lightning connect a lightning surge absorber as shown below Lightning surge absorber connection AC Y Emi GOT lis er
267. ultiple GOTs are connected to the Ethernet network Do not set the IP address 192 168 0 18 for the GOTs and the controllers in the network e When a single GOT is connected to the Ethernet network Do not set the IP address 192 168 0 18 for the controllers except the GOT in the network Doing so can cause the IP address duplication The duplication can negatively affect the communication of the device with the IP address 192 168 0 18 The operation at the IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system Turn on the controllers and the network devices to be ready for communication before they communicate with the GOT Failure to do so can cause a communication error on the GOT MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT main unit to from the panel Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the communication unit printer unit or option function board onto from the GOT Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction When installing the option function board wear an earth band etc to avoid the static electricity Not doing so can cause a unit corruption CAUTION Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual Not doing so can
268. urs in the power supply and continues for more than the permissible aie period the GOT will be reset 26 Make sure to power on the unit more than 5 seconds after power off ue 3 3 1 For GOTs powered from the 100 to 240VAC power supply 2 z 9 E eae 8 Specifications m 7 GT1675M STBA GT1675M VTBA Item GT1675 VNBA GT1695M XTBA GT1685M STBA GT1672 VNBA z GT1665M STBA A a GT1665M VTBA 39 GT1662 VNBA le o Input power supply voltage 100 to 240VAC 10 15 Input frequency 50 60Hz 5 Input max apparent power 150VA maximum load 110VA maximum load 100VA maximum load Power consumption 64W or less 46W or less 39W or less Q E gt At backlight off 38W or less 32W or less 30W or less Z Q 5 Fw Inrush current 28A or less 4ms maximum load 8 ES Allowable momentary power f 20ms or less 100VAC or more failure time a 1 500Vp p noise voltage 1 ups noise width when measuring with a noise simulator under 25 to 60Hz Noise immunity z noise frequency KB Dielectric withstand voltage 1500VAC for 1 minute across power terminals and earth 5 lt Insulation resistance 10MQ or more across power terminals and earth by a 500V DC insulation resistance tester 2 Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2 mm7 Applicable solderless Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1 25 3 V2 S3 3 V2 N3A FV2 N3A terminal Applicable tightening torque Terminal block terminal 0 5 to 0 8
269. us connection unit GT15 QBUS GT15 QBUS2 GT15 75QBUSL 50 1 97 GT15 75QBUS2L Serial communication unit a Aa Snares 28 1 10 GT15 J71LP23 25 87 3 43 MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71BR13 43 1 69 SN ee GT15 J71GP23 SX 35 1 38 eae has GT15 J71GF13 T2 21 0 83 CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 1 Video input unit 2 GT16M V4 87 3 43 RGB input unit 2 GT16M R2 32 1 26 Video RGB input unit 2 GT16M V4R1 87 3 43 RGB output unit 2 GT16M ROUT 32 1 26 Multimedia unit 2 GT16M MMR 87 3 43 Printer unit GT15 PRN 1 CF card extension unit GT15 CFEX C08SET 75 2 95 External I O unit GT15 DIO GT15 DIOR 36 1 42 14 Prohibited areas for installing the control panel side installation unit with the extension unit do not exist 2 GT1675 VN GT1672 VN GT1662 VN cannot be used 6 3 Mounting Position e For GT1655 The control panel side installation unit cannot be installed within 25mm 0 98inch from the GOT When the CF card interface built in the GOT A drive is used the unit cannot be installed within the range of 100mm 3 94inch horizontal x 68mm 2 68inch vertical from the right side of the hole for installing GOT viewed from the rear side nd The CF card cannot be installed or removed m When the other extension units are used the control panel side installation unit cannot be installed in the e areas shown in the following figure Extens
270. w Voltage Directive 5 6 5 3 EMC Directive Compliant System Configuration For the GOT1000 series models compliant with the EMC Directive contact your local distributor 5 3 1 GOT Use any of the following GOTs with which CE mark logo is printed on the rating plate For how to confirm the hardware version of a GOT refer to the following lt gt Appendix2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards When using a GOT other than shown below the system does not conform to the EMC Directive Hardware version of the GOT Item Model Production year and month Version J or later Feb 2009 GT1695M XTBA Version R or later Oct 2009 1 GT1695 Version H or later Feb 2009 GT1695M XTBD A Version Q or later Oct 2009 1 GT1685M STBA Version G or later Feb 2009 GT1685 GT1685M STBD Version F or later Feb 2009 GT1675M STBA Version F or later Oct 2009 GT1675M STBD Version E or later Oct 2009 GT1675M VTBA Version F or later Oct 2009 GT1675 GT1675M VTBD Version E or later Oct 2009 GT1675 VNBA Version A or later Apr 2010 GT1675 VNBD Version A or later Apr 2010 GT1672 VNBA Version A or later Apr 2010 GT1672 GT1672 VNBD Version A or later Apr 2010 GT1665M STBA Version G or later Oct 2009 GT1665M STBD Version E or later Oct 2009 GT1665 GT1665M VTBA Version J or later Oct 2009 GT1665M VTBD Version H or later Oct 2009 G
271. xed by the latch black Assemble the case in the reverse procedure of disassembly Tighten the fixing screws on the GOT rear face with a torque of 0 36 to 0 48 Nem When installing the case make sure that the cables are not stuck between the case and the GOT E For GT16 60SLTT GT16 60VLTT Turn off the GOT 2 Disconnect the power supply cable and the communication cable Remove the GOT from the control panel 3 Remove the right extension unit cover of the GOT Remove an extension unit including a bus connection unit if it is mounted Botton Se 9 6 Backlight Replacement 9 15 4 Remove seven fixing screws on the GOT rear face with a screwdriver 5 Remove the case after passing the battery holder through the mounting hole When removing take care of not cutting the cable of the battery holder Expanded figure of part A in step 4 6 Pull out the tray for storing the cable connector of backlight Expanded figure of part A in step 4 Packing 9 Install a new backlight in the reverse procedure of removal When inserting a new backlight into the backlight replacement hole of the GOT make sure not to damage the sheaths of the cables Insert the backlight until it is fixed by the latch black Pull the cable tight toward the right side of the tray Insert the tray until it is fixed Refer to figure in step 6 As
272. y in Insert the top plate of the backlight here Backlight top plate 9 Connect the backlight cable connector to the GOT board connector Secure the backlight cables with the cable holder B Assemble the case in the reverse procedure of disassembly Tighten the fixing screws on the GOT rear face with a torque of 0 36 to 0 48 Nem When installing the case make sure that the cables are not stuck between the case and the GOT Cable holder B Used E For GT16 70VLTN cp 2 Turn off the GOT Disconnect the power supply cable and the communication cable Remove the GOT from the control panel Remove the right extension unit cover of the GOT Remove an extension unit including a bus connection unit if it is mounted 9 6 Backlight Replacement 5 Remove the cable connector of the backlight from the connector of the GOT board Expanded figure of part A in step 4 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Remove the cables from the cab 6 Push the backlight fixing latch black to the front face to pull out the backlight Pull out the backlight so that the backlight does not hit the packing am Fluorescent tube Packing Z Install a new backlight in the reverse procedure of removal When inserting a new backlight into the backlight replacement hole of the GOT make sure not to damage the sheaths of the cables Insert the backlight until it is fi
273. yboard data transfer and storage 2 Connector type TYPE A a 6 RS 232 interface For communicating with a contor or connecting a personal computer fi Connector type D sub 9 pin n cas 7 Ethernet interface For communicating with a controler or using the gateway function Connector type RJ 45 modular jack 8 RS 422 485 interface For communicating with a controller m Connector type 14 pin female 9 Power terminal Power input terminal LG terminal FG terminal a O 10 Extension interface1 For installing an extension unit I F 1 5 w 11 Extension interface2 For installing an extension unit I F 2 m 12 CF card interface For installing a CF card Lit CF card accessed 19 OE card apGeSs LED Not lit CF card not accessed Used for stopping the access to the CF card before removing the CF card from the GOT 14 CF card access switch ON CF card being accessed CF card removal prohibited OFF CF card not accessed CF card removal possible For mounting the video input unit RGB input unit video RGB input unit RGB output unit or multimedia unit z lt w no lt 0 zz 22 Par awn 15 Video RGB interface Terminating resistor setting switch 16 For switching on and off of the terminating resistor for the RS 422 485 communication port inside the cover 17 Optional function board interface For installing the optional function board O 3 w 18
274. ystem configuration of the GOT a GOT main unit b Option function board Ol Used O Not used c Communication interface 0 e 2 O GOT built in interface z d Option unit oO Used a O Not used g e Cable between the PLC and GOT f Cable length m g If any other unit etc is used please describe it 2 System configuration of the PLC a Power supply module b CPU module c Serial communication module O Used computer link module CO Notused d Network module Ol Used O Not used e Interrupt module Ol Used O Not used f Positioning module O Used O Not used g Number of extension stages stages h If any other module etc is used please describe it Entry area for recurrence when the malfunction occurred after the action is taken 3 Describe the operation situation when freezing of the screen or faulty display of the GOT has reocurred 10 1 GOT Restoration Sheet 10 11 10 2 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection When connect GOT and PLC CPU with bus connection and the cause is not clear in 10 3 2 List of error message system alarm execute the following troubleshooting Refer to the following for details concerning the bus connection lt 3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 10 2 1 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2 GT Works2 Locating error positions Explanati

GT16 User`s Manual (Hardware)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents